Yamaha PortaTone PSR-I425 Handleiding

Categorie
Digitale piano's
Type
Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

Owners Manual
EN
2 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 3
OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den
ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,
sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også
selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko
laitetta verkosta.
(standby)
Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands)
Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien
oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei
einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben wer-
den. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.
(battery)
The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the
unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below
and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid
identification in the event of theft.
Model No. PSR-I425
Serial No.
(bottom)
4 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage
is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Use the specified adaptor (PA-3C, or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)
only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or
overheating.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.
Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,
and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects
on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll
anything over it.
Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into
any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the
instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a
sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or
smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,
disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord.
Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during
electrical storms.
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.
Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity
markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid
leakage.
Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together
with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with
manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of
batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery
fluid leakage.
Do not dispose of batteries in fire.
Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.
When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time,
remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the
battery fluid.
Keep batteries away from children.
If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid
should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with
water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause
loss of sight or chemical burns.
Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or
heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal
components.
Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile
phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may
generate noise.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Battery
Location
(4)-12 1/2
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 5
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.
When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off
the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power
switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum
level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug
the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or
rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the
internal components or result in the instrument falling over.
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes
of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume
controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,
solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel
or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the
power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might
discolor the panel or keyboard.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing
loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
Saving and backing up your data
The panel settings and some other types of data is lost when you turn off the power
to the instrument. Save the data to the Registration Memory (page 80.)
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation.
Save important data to an external device such as a computer.
Backing up the external media
•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you
save your important data onto two external media.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not
using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.
Trademarks
•Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft
®
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Connections
Maintenance
Handling caution
Saving data
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your
instrument.
(4)-12 2/2
6 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
The following is the title, credits and copyright notices for the song pre-installed in this electronic keyboard:
Composition Title : Against All Odds
Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403
Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD / HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD
All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited.
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with
respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all
computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of
such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright
has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music
data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers
or composers originally intended.
Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is
strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music
data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM
mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.
XGlite
As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format.
Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that
some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control
parameters and effects.
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with
peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the com-
puter is on).
Stereo Sampled Piano
The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling tech-
nology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system.
Touch Response
The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you
maximum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter,
which dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength—just a like a
real musical instrument!
STYLE FILE
The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to pro-
vide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.
Copyright Notice
Panel Logos
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 7
Congratulations and thank you for purchasing
the Yamaha PSR-I425 PortaTone!
Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument
in order to take full advantage of its various features.
Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading,
and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function.
The PSR-I425 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.
• Music rest
• Accessory CD-ROM
• Owner’s Manual
Included Accessories
Music Rest
Insert the music rest
into the slots as shown.
8 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Special Features of the PSR-I425
Creating New Sounds Page 18
By adjusting just two knobs you can add varying degrees of distortion,
“sweetness,” or other characteristics to a sound to change it subtly or drasti-
cally. Parameters that can be assigned to the knobs include effect, filter, enve-
lope generator and more. You can create new sounds in real time!
Arpeggio Function Page 14
Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this func-
tion automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play
the appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be pro-
duced by changing your fingering or the arpeggio type.
Performance assistant technology Page 23
Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect
performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do
is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the
keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in
time with the music.
Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 28
The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be
changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can
change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to
play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety.
Play Along with Styles Page 33
Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles.
The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band cov-
ering a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and
much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or exper-
iment with new styles to expand your musical horizons.
104
PopBossa
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 9
Copyright Notice .................................................................... 6
Panel Logos ........................................................................... 6
Included Accessories ............................................................. 7
Special Features of the PSR-I425 ......................................... 8
Setting Up 10
Power Requirements ........................................................... 10
Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)........... 11
Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) .......................... 11
Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) ......................... 11
Turning the Power On.......................................................... 11
Panel Controls and Terminals 12
Front Panel .......................................................................... 12
Rear Panel ........................................................................... 13
Quick Guide
Creating Arpeggios 14
Create Original Sounds 18
Assigning Effects to the Knobs ............................................ 18
Using the Knobs................................................................... 21
The Easy Way to Play Piano 23
Play with Both Hands........................................................... 23
Change the Song Tempo..................................................... 27
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 28
Select and Play a Voice—MAIN .......................................... 28
Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL............................ 29
Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands
—SPLIT .......................................................................... 30
Play the Grand Piano Voice................................................. 31
Drum Kits 32
Select and Play the Drum Kit ............................................... 32
Playing Styles 33
Select a Style Rhythm.......................................................... 33
Play Along with a Style ........................................................ 34
Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords.................................. 38
Using Songs 39
Select and Listen to a Song ................................................. 39
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause.................... 40
Types of Songs .................................................................... 42
Select a Song For a Lesson 43
Lesson 1—Waiting............................................................... 43
Lesson 2—Your Tempo ....................................................... 46
Lesson 3—Minus One ......................................................... 47
Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn........................ 48
Play Using the Music Database 49
Change a Song’s Style 50
Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger.............. 50
Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 50
Record Your Own Performance 52
Track Configuration.............................................................. 52
Recording Procedure ........................................................... 52
Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ...................................... 55
Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track
from a User Song............................................................ 55
Backup and Initialization 56
Backup ................................................................................. 56
Initialization .......................................................................... 56
Basic Operation and Displays 57
Basic Operation ................................................................... 57
Display Items ....................................................................... 59
Reference
Adding Effects 60
Harmony...............................................................................60
Adding Reverb .....................................................................61
Adding Chorus .....................................................................62
Handy Performance Features 63
The Metronome.................................................................... 63
Setting the Number of Beats per Measure,
and the Length of Each Beat ..........................................64
Adjusting the Metronome Volume........................................ 64
Tap Start ..............................................................................65
Touch Response Sensitivity................................................. 65
Pitch Bend............................................................................ 66
Pitch Controls....................................................................... 66
Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics....... 67
One Touch Setting ...............................................................68
Adjusting the Harmony Volume............................................69
Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound............................. 69
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 70
Pattern Variation (Sections) .................................................70
Adjusting the Style Volume ..................................................72
Setting the Split Point........................................................... 72
Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm
(Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................73
Loading Style Files............................................................... 74
Chord Basics........................................................................ 75
Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ..................77
Song Settings 78
Song Volume........................................................................78
A-B Repeat...........................................................................78
Muting Independent Song Parts...........................................79
Change the Melody Voice.................................................... 79
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 80
Saving to the Registration Memory...................................... 80
Recalling a Registration Memory .........................................81
The Functions 82
Selecting and Setting Functions...........................................82
Connecting to a Computer 85
What Is MIDI? ......................................................................85
Connecting a Personal Computer........................................ 86
Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer.....87
Remote Control of MIDI Devices..........................................88
Initial Send ...........................................................................89
Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument... 89
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 92
Important Notices about the CD-ROM .................................92
CD-ROM Contents............................................................... 93
System Requirements.......................................................... 94
Software Installation............................................................. 94
Appendix
Troubleshooting................................................................. 99
Scores ............................................................................... 100
Let’s play the Tabla.......................................................... 106
Voice List .......................................................................... 107
Drum Kit List .................................................................... 111
Style List ........................................................................... 114
Arpeggio List.................................................................... 115
Music Database List ........................................................ 116
Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM ................... 118
Effect Type List ................................................................ 119
MIDI Implementation Chart ............................................. 120
MIDI Data Format ............................................................. 122
Specifications................................................................... 123
Index.................................................................................. 124
Contents
10 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.
Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC
adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete
resources.
Using an AC Power Adaptor
Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the
instrument is set to STANDBY.
Connect the AC power adaptor to the power supply
jack.
Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.
Using Batteries
Open the battery compartment cover located on the
instrument’s bottom panel.
Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow
the polarity markings on the inside of the compart-
ment.
Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it
locks firmly in place.
For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V
“D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline
batteries are recommended.) When battery power
becomes too low for proper operation, make sure to
replace all batteries, following the precautions listed
below.
If necessary, also make sure to save all important User
data (see page 56), since custom panel settings are
lost when the batteries are removed.
Power Requirements
Use the specified adaptor (PA-3C, or an equivalent recom-
mended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may
result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the
instrument.
WARNING
Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument,
or during electrical storms.
CAUTION
Adaptor
AC outlet
Connecting the AC power adaptor automatically supplies power from
the adaptor and overrides battery power, even when batteries are
installed.
NOTE
Use only manganese or alkaline batteries for this instrument.
Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may
exhibit a sudden drop in power when the batteries are low, possi-
bly resulting in a loss of flash memory data.
Be sure to install the batteries in the same direction, maintaining
the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may
result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals.
When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of
six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use
different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the
same time.
If the instrument will not be used for an extended period of time,
remove the batteries to prevent possible fluid leakage.
Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash
memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained
rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become
drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and
the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost.
CAUTION
Setting Up
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 11
Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on.
The PSR-I425 speakers are automatically shut off when
a plug is inserted into this jack.
The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an exter-
nal output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT
jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape
recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the
instrument’s output signal to that device.
The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain
as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha
FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch
sustain on and off.
Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB ter-
minal of a computer, and you can transfer performance
data and song files between the two (page 86). To use
the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the fol-
lowing:
• First, make sure the POWER switch on the instru-
ment is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to con-
nect the instrument to the computer. After making
the connections, turn on the power of the instru-
ment.
• Install the USB MIDI driver on your computer.
Installation of the USB MIDI driver is described on
page 94.
Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOL-
UME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON]
switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON]
switch again to turn the power OFF.
Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instru-
ment when the power is turned on. If no backup data
exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are
restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is
turned on.
Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)
Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)
•Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long peri-
ods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be
damaging to your hearing.
WARNING
•To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external
devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to
observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment
damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their
minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while
playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
CAUTION
Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUS-
TAIN jack before turning on the power.
Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this
changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed
footswitch operation.
NOTE
Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)
Turning the Power On
Make sure to purchase a quality USB cable at a musical instrument
store, computer store or electrical appliance store.
NOTE
Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is
still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are
not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the
AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the bat-
teries from the instrument.
CAUTION
•Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message
is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory
and result in data loss.
CAUTION
12 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Panel Controls and Terminals
q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 11
w [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 11, 24
e [TOUCH ON/OFF] button ................ page 65
r [HARMONY ON/OFF] button .......... page 60
t [DUAL ON/OFF] button ................... page 29
y [SPLIT ON/OFF] button ................... page 30
u [DEMO] button................................. page 40
i LESSON [START] button ................ page 44
o LESSON [L/R] button ...................... page 44
!0 [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button.......... page 14
!1 [PERFORMANCE
ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button .......... page 23
!2 [FUNCTION] button ......................... page 82
!3 [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 49
!4 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button ..... page 63
!5 [PORTABLE GRAND] button.......... page 31
!6 Dial ............................................pages 58, 82
!7 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ]
buttons......................................pages 58, 82
!8 [SONG] button................................. page 39
!9 [EASY SONG ARRANGER]
button............................................... page 50
@0 [STYLE] button................................ page 33
@1 [VOICE] button ................................ page 28
@2 Number buttons [0]–[9],
[+] and [-] buttons ....................pages 58, 82
@3 [ASSIGN] button.............................. page 18
@4 [A] and [B] knobs............................ page 21
@5 [ ](REPEAT & LEARN)/
[ACMP ON/OFF] button ...........pages 48, 34
Front Panel
f
r
Front Panel
001
001
GrandPno
q
w
e
r
t
y
@3 @4
#4
@5 @6 @7 @8 @9 #0 #1
u
i o
!0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
Song Category List
(page 41)
Style Category List
(page 114)
Display
(page 59)
Panel Controls and Terminals
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 13
@6 [A-B REPEAT]/
[SYNC STOP] button ............... pages 78, 71
@7 [PAUSE]/
[SYNC START] button ............. pages 40, 70
@8 [REW]/
[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .... pages 40, 71
@9 [FF]/
[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ....... pages 40, 71
#0 [START/STOP] button ....... pages 33, 40, 58
#1 [TEMPO/TAP] button ....................... page 27
#2 REGIST MEMORY
[] (MEMORY/BANK),
[1], [2] buttons ................................. page 80
#3 SONG MEMORY
[REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 52
#4 PITCH BEND wheel ......................... page 66
#5 Drum Kit icons................................. page 32
#6 USB terminal ............................pages 11, 86
#7 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 11
#8 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 11
#9 DC IN 12V jack................................. page 10
Rear Panel
#2 #3
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
@1
@2
#5
#6 #7 #8 #9
Voice Category List
(page 107)
Rear Panel
Music Database List
(page 116)
14 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Creating Arpeggios
The arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by
simply playing the required notes on the keyboard. For example, you
could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—and the arpeg-
gio function will automatically create a variety of interesting arpeggio-
type phrases. By changing the arpeggio type and the notes you play it
is possible to create a wide range of patterns and phrases that can be
used for music production as well as performance.
1
Press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeg-
gio function on.
Voices and the Arpeggio Function
This instrument lets you select a variety of “voices” that you can play
via the keyboard. When you select a voice number between 129 and 143
the arpeggio function will automatically be engaged so you can start
playing arpeggios immediately. The arpeggio function will automati-
cally be turned off when you select any other voice.
If you want to use voices 129–143 for normal performance without the
arpeggio function, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the
arpeggio function off after selecting the voice.
Voices for which the arpeggio function is automatically turned on.
Voice No. Voice Name Voice No. Voice Name
129 Teen Tal C 137 Square Pulse
130 Teen Tal F 138 Trance
131 Teen Tal A 139 Synth Echo
132 Dadra D 140 Piano Arpeggio
133 Dadra E 141 Guitar Chord
134 Dadra G 142 Guitar Arpeggio
135 Synth Sequence 143 Massive Percussion
136 Chord Sequence
001
001
GrandPno
The ARPEGGIO icon appears when
the arpeggio function is on.
See “Try Playing a Variety of
Instrument Voices” on page 28.
NOTE
Quick Guide
Creating Arpeggios
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 15
2
Select an arpeggio type.
The most suitable arpeggio type is automatically selected when you
select a voice, but you can easily select any other arpeggio type.
Hold the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button for longer than a second and
the name of the current arpeggio type will appear in the display. Rotate
the dial to select the desired arpeggio type. A list of the available arpeg-
gio types is provided on page 115.
3
Play the keyboard.
The sound of the arpeggio produced will change according to the num-
ber of notes you play and the area of the keyboard you play in. You can
save the instrument’s settings at this point and then recall them at any
time you want to repeat your performance (page 80). You can also
record your performance (page 52).
The arpeggio function applies only to the main and dual voices, and
does not affect split voices. The arpeggio function cannot be used at the
same time as the harmony function.
4
When you have finished playing with the arpeggio func-
tion, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn it off.
02
DownOct1
ARP Type
Hold for longer
than a second
The currently selected
arpeggio type
Make sure that you are not
pressing any of the keyboard’s
keys while turning the arpeggio
function on or off.
NOTE
Creating Arpeggios
16 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Create a Pop Tune
You can play a style and specify the style chords with your left hand while playing arpeggios with your
right hand to create interesting sonic textures and backgrounds.
1 Select the keyboard voice (page 28).
For this example we’ll use a grand piano voice, so press the [PORTABLE GRAND]
button. This convenient voice selection method lets you instantly select a voice with a
single button press.
2 After turning the arpeggio function on, select an arpeggio type (steps 1
and 2 on the preceding page).
For this example select “02 DownOct1”.
That completes preparation to use the arpeggio function.
3 Select the style you want to play along with the arpeggio function.
A “style” is an automatic accompaniment pattern.
Press the [STYLE] button and the name of the currently selected style will appear in the
display. Rotate the dial to select the desired style. For this example we’ll use the “001
8BtModrn” (8 Beat Modern) style.
8BtModrn
001
Refer to “Playing Styles” on page 33.
NOTE
Creating Arpeggios
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 17
4 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on.
When auto accompaniment is turned on, the left-hand section of the keyboard is used only
for specifying accompaniment chords.
5 Press the [START/STOP] button.
The rhythm accompaniment will start.
6 Begin playing.
Listen carefully to the rhythm of the style, then play the notes shown in the score at the
beginning of a measure. The style and arpeggio will begin playing together.
The accompaniment will change accordingly each time you play a new left-hand chord.
Of course you can also change your right-hand fingering to produce interesting changes.
If you’re not comfortable with right-hand playing yet, you could use the performance
assistant technology feature described on page 23. When the performance assistant feature
is on, playing any right-hand key will always produce musically appropriate notes!
Whenever you’re playing a style as well as a right-hand part, be sure that your left hand
plays only to the left of the split point and your right hand plays only to the right of the
split point. (page 30)
8BtModrn
001
The ACMP ON icon will
appear.
Refer to “When automatic accompaniment is on ...” on page 34.
NOTE
CAm FG7sus4
Split point
18 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Create Original Sounds
The two knobs located in the lower left area of the panel can be used to
add variations to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a
variety of musical ways. Filter, envelope generator, and other effects
can be assigned to the two knobs as required. In this section we’ll
explain how effects can be assigned to the knobs, and provide a few
tips for their use.
Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially select the five effect combinations provided: z
x c v b z ... etc. The currently selected combination is shown in the display.
zc affect the main and dual voices only. Split voices will not be affected. Styles and songs will also not
be affected.
vb affect styles only.
Assigning Effects to the Knobs
001
001
GrandPno
The assignable knob effects are pre-programmed in the pairs listed above.
It is not possible to assign different effect combinations.
Number/Effect Knob A Knob B
z Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance
x Effect Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level
c EG Attack Time Release Time
v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance
b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect–
Create Original Sounds
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 19
z Filter
Filter effects shape sound by allowing only a specified range of frequencies
to pass and/or by producing a resonance peak at the filter’s “cutoff” fre-
quency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizer-like
sounds.
* Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass frequencies.
Some hints for using the filter effects are provided on page 22.
Knob A adjusts the filter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the brightness of
the sound.
Knob B adjusts the amount of resonance applied at the filter’s cutoff fre-
quency. Increasing the resonance emphasizes the frequencies at the cutoff
frequency, and thus “strengthens” the perceived effect of the filter.
x Effect
Reverb reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or club, while
chorus produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect.
Knob A adjusts the depth of the reverb effect, and Knob B adjusts the depth
of the chorus effect.
Filter ResonanceFilter Cutoff
Cutoff Frequency
Level
Frequencies in this
range are passed.
Frequencies in this
range are cut off.
Frequency
Resonance
Frequency
Level
Chorus Send
Level
Reverb Send
Level
Create Original Sounds
20 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
c EG (Envelope Generator)
Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of the sound varies over
time. You can make the attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower
for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or shorten the sus-
tain to most ideally match the music.
Knob A adjusts attack time (the amount of time it takes the sound to reach
maximum level when a key is played).
Knob B adjusts release time (the amount of time it takes for the sound to
decay to silence after a key is released).
v Style Filter
In this case the knobs apply the filter effect to the style being played. Knob A
and Knob B have the same functions as for “z Filter” described on the pre-
ceding page.
b Style Tempo
Knob A adjusts the tempo of the style and arpeggios. Rotating the knob
clockwise increases the tempo while rotating it counterclockwise decreases
the tempo. The knob’s center position produces the initial default tempo.
Release TimeAttack Time
AT TAC K
RELEASE
DECAY
Key Played
Sustain Level
Key Released
Time
Level
Filter ResonanceFilter Cutoff
–No Effect–Tempo
Create Original Sounds
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 21
1
Select the voice you want to play on the keyboard.
The name of the currently selected voice will appear in the display when
you press the [VOICE] button. Use the dial to select the desired voice.
For this example we want to use a synth-lead type voice, so select “97
SquareLd” (Square-wave Lead).
2
Press the [ASSIGN] button as many times as necessary to
select “z FILTER” (“zwill appear in the display).
Knob A can now be used to adjust the filter cutoff frequency, and Knob
B can be used to adjust the resonance.
3
Rotate Knob B to its maximum setting (all the way to the
right).
Rotating the knob to the right while the volume is set to a high level can
result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce the volume level.
Using the Knobs
097
SquareLd
097
SquareLd
zappears here.
Filter
Resonance
Filter
Cutoff
Create Original Sounds
22 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
4
Play with the right hand while operating Knob A with the
left hand.
If you select a different keyboard voice the knobs will be reset and the
ideal settings for the selected voice will be automatically recalled. In the
same way, if the “v STYLE FILTER” effect is selected, the knobs will
be reset if a different style is selected. If you create an original setting
you like, it might be a good idea to save it in the instrument’s Registra-
tion Memory (page 80) so you can recall the same settings again at any
time. You can also record performances using original sounds you’ve
created (page 52).
The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects
that can be assigned to the knobs.
Some Ideas for Using the Knobs
Changing the knob settings does not immediately change the sound. Newly
assigned effects will only change the sound when the knobs are first
operated after the new effect has been selected.
Number/Effect Try This
z FILTER
Select a synth-type lead or pad voice (page 107). Turn Knob B all the way up and operate Knob A
while playing for some spacey, floating 1980’s effects.
x EFFECT
Select a voice that sounds as though it already has reverb and chorus effects applied, and turn
Knob A and Knob B all the way down to hear the “direct” sound of the voice. You can then turn the
Knob A and Knob B settings up to add extra impact and richness to the voice.
c EG
Select a piano voice, and turn Knob B all the way up and Knob A to about the 3 o’clock position.
This should give you a majestic, organ-like sound. The attack time is quite long so play the keys
and hold them to let the sound come in fully. Ideal for slow pieces.
v STYLE FILTER
Select style 31, Euro Trance. Turn accompaniment on and start style playback (page 34). Set
Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The overall sound of the style should be
a bit muffled, with the drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact.
b STYLE TEMPO Play a style and/or arpeggio (page 14) and use Knob A to adjust the tempo.
Filter
Resonance
Filter
Cutoff
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 23
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
The Easy Way to Play Piano
This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature
that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even
though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any
notes and still sound good!
So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can
have some musical fun. It’s never too late to start learning!
Refer to page 25 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play.
1
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button.
This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.
The P.A.T. icon and “PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT” will be dis-
played.
2
Select a song.
Press the [SONG] button, and the song number and name will be dis-
played. You can use the dial or other selection controls to select a differ-
ent song.
For this example try selecting the “010 AveMaria”.
Play with Both Hands
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/
OFF] button to turn the function on or off.
Icon will appear when performance
assistant technology is on.
011
Nocturne
010
AveMaria
The song displayed here
will be played.
Song number
Song name
The Easy Way to Play Piano
24 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
3
Press the [START/STOP] button.
Song playback will begin.
The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to four measures while memorizing
the basic pattern. It’s your tune to play the part from the fifth measure.
4
Play on the keyboard.
Play the score on the left along with the accompaniment using both
hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G,
C, E. Performance assistant technology will make sure that the notes
will come out as if they were played according to the score on the right.
Keep playing, and performance assistant technology will continue to
“correct” the notes that you play.
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]
button.
What is a “Song”?
Of course you know the normal meaning of the word, but for this
instrument the term “song” also refers to the data that makes up a piece of
music. You can listen to the songs, use them for lessons, and use them with
a range of other functions (page 39).
Adjusts volume.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 25
5
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button to
turn the performance assistant technology feature off.
The complete score for Ave Maria is provided on page 102.
Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro!
To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands
spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alter-
nately with your left and right hands (any notes will do).
How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where
you play thanks to performance assistant technology!
Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways
of playing produce different results.
Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and
a melody with your right ... or any other combination.
To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a song that includes chord data, or a
style with auto accompaniment on.
If a song includes the required data, the chords are shown on the right side of the display (page 59).
You will get even better
results if you match your
left-hand rhythm to the
rhythm of the chord indica-
tor in the display.
Sounds like you’re
playing the right
notes!
Play with the left and right hands
at the same timing—type 1.
Play with the left and right hands
at the same timing—type 2.
Play alternately with the left and
right hands—type 3.
Play 3 notes at once
with your right hand.
Play 1 note at a time with your right
hand (for example: index finger
middle finger
ring finger).
Play 3 notes at once with
your right hand.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
26 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Next try playing the Chopin Nocturne.
1
The procedure is that same as that described for playing
Ave Maria on pages 23–25. Select “011 Nocturne”.
2
Listen to eight measures, then begin playing from the
ninth measure.
Play the keys shown in the illustration. Keep playing F, A and C with
your left hand and the correct notes will sound as the song proceeds.
When you get used to playing the left hand part, refer to “The Easy Way
to Play Piano” on page 23 and try adding the right-hand part.
3
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button to
turn the performance assistant technology feature off.
The complete score for Nocturne is provided on page 104.
011
Nocturne
The Easy Way to Play Piano
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 27
When using the performance assistant technology or in other situations in which the tempo of the song is
too fast or too slow for you, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The
tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons
to set to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute.
You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons.
About the Beat Display
The arrow marks in the beat display flash in time with the rhythm of the song or style.
Change the Song Tempo
Current tempo value
090
Tempo
Second beat Fourth beat
First beat of measure Third beat
28 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments,
this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass,
strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide
variety of musical sounds.
This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard.
1
Press the [VOICE] button.
The voice number and name will be displayed.
2
Select the voice you want to play.
While watching the displayed voice name rotate the dial. The available
voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected
here becomes the main voice.
For this example select the “092 Flute” voice.
3
Play the keyboard.
Try selecting and playing a variety of voices.
Select and Play a Voice—MAIN
001
GrandPno
Voice number
Voice name
Appears when the Voice mode
is engaged.
•You can also select the voice
using the CATEGORY [ ] and
[] buttons after pressing the
[VOICE] button. (page 58)
NOTE
f
r
092
Flute
Select 092 Flute
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 29
You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard.
The second voice is known as the “dual” voice.
1
Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button.
The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off.
When turned on the dual voice icon will appear in the display. The cur-
rently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when
you play the keyboard.
2
Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than
a second.
“D.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently
selected dual voice will be displayed.
3
Select the desired dual voice.
Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you
want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice.
For this example try selecting the “109 Vibraphone” voice.
Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL
The dual voice feature cannot
be used during a song lesson
(page 43).
NOTE
092
Flute
Dual voice icon
•You can also select the Dual
Voice display by pressing the
[FUNCTION] button and then
using the CATEGORY [ ] and
[] buttons to select the
“D.Voice” item.
NOTE
f
r
D.Voice
Hold for longer
than a second
110
Marimba
The currently selected
dual voice
109
Vibes
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
30 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
4
Play the keyboard.
Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices.
In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main
and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split
point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 72).
1
Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.
The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off.
When turned on the split voice icon will appear in the display. The cur-
rently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split
point.
2
Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than
a second.
“S.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently
selected split voice will be displayed.
Two voices will sound at the same time.
Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT
Main voice and dual voiceSplit voice
Split point
The split voice feature cannot
be used during a song lesson
(page 43).
NOTE
092
Flute
Split voice icon
•You can also select the Split
Voice display by pressing the
[FUNCTION] button and then
using the CATEGORY [ ] and
[] buttons to select the
“S.Voice” item.
NOTE
f
r
Hold for longer
than a second
042
FngrBass
S.Voice
The currently selected
SPLIT voice
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 31
3
Select the desired split voice.
Watch the displayed split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you
want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice
which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example
try selecting the “033 Folk Guitar” voice.
4
Play the keyboard.
Try selecting and playing a range of split voices.
When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button.
Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.
The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected.
033
Folk Gtr
Play the Grand Piano Voice
When you press the [PORTA-
BLE GRAND] button all settings
other than touch sensitivity are
turned off. The dual and split
voices will also be turned off, so
only the Grand Piano voice will
play over the entire keyboard.
NOTE
32 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Drum Kits
This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects
you can use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys,
eerie effects, and much more. These sounds can be a great way to
enhance the mood at parties.
Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments.
When drum kits (Voice numbers 117–128, 152, 153) are selected, you can play different percussion sounds
directly from the keyboard.
1
Press the [VOICE] button.
2
Select the desired Drum kit.
Select one of the Voice numbers from 117–128, 152, 153 by rotating the
dial.
* When Voice number 117 is selected, the icons printed above the keyboard indicates the instruments assigned to each key.
3
Try out each key.
You’ll hear bongo drums, congas, maracas, and more-a comprehensive
variety of drum and percussion sounds.
Details on the instruments and key assignments of each drum kit can be
found in the Drum Kit List on page 111.
Drum Kit List
117 Standard Kit 1 122 Analog Kit 127 SFX Kit 1
118 Standard Kit 2 123 Dance Kit 128 SFX Kit 2
119 Room Kit 124 Jazz Kit 152 Tabla Kit
120 Rock Kit 125 Brush Kit 153 Indian Kit
121 Electronic Kit 126 Symphony Kit
Select and Play the Drum Kit
117
Std.Kit1
Example: 117 Standard Kit 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Ta mbourine
Cowbell
Vibraslap
Bongo L
Hi-Hat Open
Crash Cymbal 1
Hand Clap
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
Open Rim Shot
Side Stick
Castanet
Sticks
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Conga H Open
Timbale L
Agogo L
Maracas
Guiro Short
Claves
Cuica Mute
Tr ia ngle Mute
Shaker
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Splash Cymbal
Crash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
Conga H Mute
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
Snare Tight
Floor Tom L
Low Tom
Floor Tom H
Kick Tight
Kick
Snare
Snare Roll
Snare Soft
Kick Soft
Seq Click H
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
Conga L
Timbale H
Agogo H
Cabasa
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Long
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Open
Tr ia ngle Open
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
C3
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 33
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Playing Styles
This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces
accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to
match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 162 dif-
ferent styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures
(see page 114 for a complete list of the available styles).
In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features.
Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—indian, rock,
blues, Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part
is played using percussion instruments only.
1
Press the [STYLE] button.
The style number and name will appear in the display.
2
Select a style.
Use the dial to select the style you want to use.
A list of all the available styles is provided on page 114.
3
Press the [START/STOP] button.
The style rhythm will start playing.
Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop
playback.
Select a Style Rhythm
001
8BtModrn
Style Number
Style Name
This icon appears when a style
number and name is displayed.
104
PopBossa
Style numbers 138, 150–162
have no rhythm part and there-
fore no rhythm will play if you
use them for the above exam-
ple. For these styles first turn
auto accompaniment on as
described on page 34, press the
[SYNC START] button, and the
accompaniment bass and chord
parts will begin playing when
you play a key to the left of the
keyboard split point.
NOTE
Playing Styles
34 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page.
Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accom-
paniment that you can play along with.
1
Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style.
2
Turn automatic accompaniment on.
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.
Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment
off.
3
Turn sync start on.
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on.
When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a
style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard
split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function
off.
When automatic accompaniment is on ...
The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the
“auto accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the
accompaniment chords.
Play Along with a Style
This icon appears when auto-
matic accompaniment is on.
104
PopBossa
The keyboard split point can be
changed as required: refer to
page 72.
NOTE
Split point (54 : F#2)
Auto accompani-
ment range
Flashes when sync
start is on.
104
PopBossa
Playing Styles
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 35
4
Play a left-hand chord to start the style.
You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords.
This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try playing
from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point. The
accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you play.
5
Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody
with your right hand.
6
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback
when you’re done.
You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment.
Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 70.
Try this!
Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 36.
These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord
progressions sound good with the styles.
Auto accompani-
ment range
Split point
Auto accompani-
ment range
Split point
Playing Styles
36 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords
Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment.
In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord
sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same
chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall
feel of the music you play.
On page 34 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital
to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take
your accompaniments to a new level.
On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the
instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively
creating a complete song.
Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Play the scores with the left hand.
Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 34.
* The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to
produce the chord progressions.
—Dance music with simple chords—
This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start
again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button
and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending.
Recommended Style
031 Euro Trance
Play to the left of the split point.
Split point
F
C G Am
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Playing Styles
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 37
—3-chord boogie-woogie—
This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the
progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords!
—Bossa nova with jazz-style chords—
This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When
you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Recommended Style
155 Piano Boogie
Recommended Style
103 Bossa Nova
F
G
F
C C
C
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
G7
E7
Dm CM7
Am A7
FM7
Bm7
5
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Playing Styles
38 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords:
Easy Chords
Standard Chords
The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. This function is called Multi Fingering.
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 34). The keyboard to the left of
the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in
this area of the keyboard.
Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This method lets you easily play chords in the
accompaniment range of the keyboard using only
one, two, or three fingers.
Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This method lets you produce accompaniment by
playing chords using normal fingerings in the
accompaniment range of the keyboard.
Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords
C
D
b
E
b
F
#
G
#
B
b
D
b
E
b
F
#
DEFGABCDEF
Split point (default: 54/F#2)
Root notes and the corresponding keys
Accompaniment
range
•To play a major chord
Press the root note of the chord.
C
Cm
C7
Cm7
•To play a minor chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest black key to the left of it.
•To play a seventh chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest white key to the left of it.
•To play a minor seventh chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest white and black keys to the left
of it (three keys altogether).
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
CmM7
CM7
C6
Csus4
Caug
CM7aug
C7aug
C7sus4
C1+2+5
C7
Cm
Cdim
Cdim7
C7
CmM7
(
9
)
CM7
(
9
)
Cm7
(
9
)
C7
(
b9
)
C7
(
b13
)
Cm7
(
11
)
CM7
(
#11
)
C
(
b5
)
C
(
9
)
(
9
)
C6
(
9
)
Cm
(
9
)
C7
(
#11
)
C7
(
#9
)
C7
(
13
)
C7
Cm6
Cm7
C
(
b5
)
CM7
(
b5
)
Cm7
(
b5
)
CmM7
(
b5
)
How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords]
* Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords
will be recognized without them.
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 39
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Using Songs
With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a
piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs,
or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the
performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The
songs are organized by category.
In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly
describe the 30 songs provided.
1
Press the [SONG] button.
The song number and name will be displayed.
You can use the dial to select a different song.
2
Select a song.
Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 41.
Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to.
Listen Lesson Record
Song
Select and Listen to a Song
011
Nocturne
The currently selected song
and number are displayed
•You can also play songs you
have recorded yourself (User
Songs) or songs that have been
transferred to the instrument
from a computer in the same
way that you play the internal
songs.
NOTE
012
ForElise
The song displayed here
can be played
Using Songs
40 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
3
Listen to the song.
Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-
ton again.
These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF],
rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song.
001–030 Built in Songs (see next page)
031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself).
036– Songs transferred from a computer (pages 89–91)
Using the [DEMO] button
Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs 001–008 in sequence. Playback
will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song (001).
You can select a song by using the [-] and [+] buttons after pressing the
[DEMO] button.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] button.
Song start!
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause
PAUSE
Press the pause but-
ton to pause playback.
REW
Press the fast reverse
button to rapidly
return to an earlier
point in the song.
FF
Press the fast forward
button to rapidly skip
ahead to a later point
in the song.
When an A-B repeat range is
specified the fast reverse and
forward function will only work
within that range.
NOTE
Using Songs
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 41
Song List
These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s easy song arranger feature,
songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Sug-
gested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used.
: Includes chord data.
The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, and song 20 which are copyrighted, are provided in the Song Book on
the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual.
Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same
as the original.
Category No. Name Suggested Uses
Main Demo
1 Bhajan Demo
The songs in this category are original Indian
songs. They’re designed for your listening
pleasure and provide a wonderful introduction to
the advanced capabilities of this instrument.
2 Bhangra Demo
3 South Indian Folk Demo
Voice Demo
4Grand Piano Demo
These songs features some of the instrument’s
many useful voices. They make maximum use of
the characteristics of each voice, and might serve
as inspiration for your own compositions.
5Sweet! TenorSax Demo
6 Cool! RotorOrgan Demo
7 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo
8 ModernHarp & Sweet Soprano Demo
Function Demo
9 Hallelujah Chorus
Use these songs to experience some of the
instrument’s advanced features: song number 9
for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11
for the performance assistant technology feature.
10 Ave Maria
11 Nocturne op.9-2
Piano Solo
12 For Elise
These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use
as lesson songs.
13 Maple Leaf Rag
14 The Last Rose of Summer
Piano Ensemble
15 Amazing Grace
A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also
well suited for use as lesson songs.
16 Die Lorelei
17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov.
18 Scarborough Fair
19 Old Folks at Home
Piano Accompaniment
20
Ac Ballad
(Against All Odds: Collins 0007403)
When you need to practice backing
(accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to
do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited
to play with a band. These songs allow you to
practice backing parts one hand at a time, which
can be the easiest way to master this important
skill.
21 Ep Ballad
22 Boogie Woogie
23 Rock Piano
24 Salsa
25 Country Piano
26 Gospel R&B
27 Medium Swing
28 Jazz Waltz
29 Medium Bossa
30 SlowRock
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
Using Songs
42 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
The following three types of songs can be used by the PSR-I425.
Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument)................Song numbers 001–030.
User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035.
External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–.
* The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 90 for instructions on how to
transfer the songs to the instrument.
The chart below shows the basic PSR-I425 processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and exter-
nal song files—from storage to playback.
Types of Songs
Transfer
(page 90)
Record
(page 52)
Your own performance
PSR-I425 Song Storage loca-
tions
Preset Songs
(001–030)
User Songs
(031–035)
Flash Memory
(036–134)
The 30 songs built
into the instru-
ment.
Stored in the inter-
nal flash memory.
Save to internal
flash memory. Cur-
rently available.
Play
External song files
can be saved to flash
memory (036–134).
Different flash memory areas
are used to store user songs
and external song files trans-
ferred from a computer. User
songs cannot be directly trans-
ferred to the external song file
flash memory area, and vice
versa.
NOTE
Computer
External song file
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 43
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Select a Song For a Lesson
Yamaha Education Suite
You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or
both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) down-
loaded from the Internet and saved to flash memory. (pages 89–91) Dur-
ing the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play
wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle.
It’s never too late to start learning!
Lesson Flow:
Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category!
The practice methods:
Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes.
Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing.
Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song.
In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you
play the right note.
1
Select a song for your lesson.
Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want
to use for your lesson. As listed on page 42 there are a variety of song
types. For this example try selecting the “012 ForElise”.
Select the
song you want
to learn.
Select the part you want
to work on (right hand,
left hand, both hands).
Select lesson
1, 2, or 3.
Lesson
start!
Lesson 1—Waiting
012
ForElise
Select a Song For a Lesson
44 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
2
Select the part you want to practice.
Each time you press the LESSON [L/R] button the parts are selected in
sequence: right hand left hand both hands right hand ....
The currently selected part is shown in the display.
3
Start Lesson 1.
Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the
LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in
sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Lesson 1 …. The
currently selected mode is shown in the display.
Right
Left
BothHand
Right-hand lesson
Left-hand lesson
Both-hands lesson
r1
Waiting
r2
YourTemp
r3
MinusOne
012
ForElise
(Lesson 1)
(Lesson 2)
(Lesson 3)
(Song Lesson off)
Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1.
Select a Song For a Lesson
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 45
Play the note shown in the display. When you play the correct note, the
next note you need play is shown. The song will wait until you play the
correct note.
4
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2.
See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again
from the beginning.
r1
007
Waiting
Left-hand part Right-hand part
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)
In this case
r1indicate that right-hand
lesson 1 has been selected.
~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~
~~~~
~~
Excellent
Very Good
Good
OK
When the lesson song has played all the way through your
performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very
Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation.
The evaluation feature can be
turned off via the FUNCTION
Grade item (page 84).
NOTE
Select a Song For a Lesson
46 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed
you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own
pace.
1
Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and
2 on pages 43, 44).
2
Start Lesson 2.
Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are
selected in sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Les-
son 1 ...
Play the note shown in the display. Try to play the notes at the correct
timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo
will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original
tempo.
3
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3.
Lesson 2—Your Tempo
r2
YourTemp
In this case r2indicate that right-
hand lesson 2 has been selected.
Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected.
Left-hand part Right-hand part
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)
Select a Song For a Lesson
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 47
Here’s where you can perfect your technique.
The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening
to the song.
1
Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and
2 on pages 43, 44).
2
Start Lesson 3.
Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are
selected in sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Les-
son 1 ...
Play the note shown in the display.
3
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
Lesson 3—Minus One
r3
MinusOne
In this case r3indicate that right-
hand lesson 3 has been selected.
Start the lesson!Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected.
Left-hand part Right-hand part
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)
Select a Song For a Lesson
48 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to
repeatedly practice a section you find difficult.
Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button during a les-
son.
The song location will move back four measures from the point at
which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-mea-
sure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you
pressed the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button, and then jump back
four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat,
so all you have to do is press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button
when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until
you get it right.
Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn
•You can change the number of
measures the Repeat and learn
function jumps back by pressing
a number button [1]–[9] during
repeat playback.
NOTE
Press immediately
Oops!
A mistake!
e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback
q
w
Song playback
direction
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 49
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Play Using the Music Database
You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to
select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ...
simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel
settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds
and style!
1
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
A Music Database name will appear in the display.
2
Select a Music Database.
Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 116 of
the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that
matches the image of the song you intend to play.
For this example select the “124 DayOfW&R”.
3
Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your
right.
The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the
left of the split point (page 30). Refer to page 38 for information about
playing chords.
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
001
AlvFever
124
DayOfW&R
Split Point
50 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Change a Song’s Style
In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style
to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that
you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa
nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrange-
ments by changing the style with which a song is played.
You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice
for a complete change of image.
The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it.
Press the [SONG] button, then select a “009 Hallelujah
Chorus” by using the dial. Press the [START/STOP] button
to play it.
As the song progresses, you will see only the style changes while the
song remains the same.
Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other
songs as well—any songs that include chord data.
1
Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.
The song number and name will be displayed.
2
Select a Song.
Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange.
Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger
009
Halleluj
Using the Easy Song Arranger
009
Halleluj
The currently selected song number
and name are displayed here.
Change a Song’s Style
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 51
3
Listen to the song.
Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move
on to the next step while the song is playing.
4
Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.
The style number and name will be displayed.
5
Select a style.
Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles.
As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only
the styles change. When you have selected a suitable style move on to
the next step while the song is still playing (if you have stopped the
song, start it again by pressing the [START/STOP] button).
6
Select a voice you want to play as a song melody.
Press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected voice number and
name will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different voice.
7
Change the song’s melody voice.
Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. After
SONG MELODY VOICE appears on the display the voice you selected
in step 6 becomes the song’s melody voice.
When playing song numbers
010, 011 and 020 to 030 while
using the Easy Song Arranger,
melody tracks will be automati-
cally muted and no melody will
sound. In order to hear the mel-
ody tracks you will need to
press the SONG MEMORY but-
tons [3] to [5].
NOTE
Song start!
015
PopShf 1
The currently selected style number
and name are displayed here.
Because the Easy Song
Arranger uses song data you
can’t specify chords by playing
in the accompaniment range of
the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/
OFF] button will not function.
If the time signature of the song
and style are different, the time
signature of the song will be
used.
NOTE
001
GrandPno
The currently selected voice number
and name are displayed here.
Hold for longer than a second
SONG MEL
52 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Q
u
i
c
k
G
u
i
d
e
Record Your Own Performance
You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as
user songs 031 through 035. The recorded song can be played back on
the instrument.
Recordable Data
You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track.
Each track can be recorded individually.
Melody Track [1]–[5].......... Record the melody parts.
Style Track [A] ................... Records the chord part.
To record your own performance, first use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the
track(s) you want to record on. The track you record on determines the part that plays back later.
1
Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the
user song number (031–035) you want to record to.
Up to approximately 10,000
notes can be recorded if you
record only to the melody
tracks. Up to approximately
5,500 chord changes can be
recorded if you record only to
the style track.
NOTE
Track Configuration
The Difference Between MELODY R and MELODY L …
Songs are a combination of a melody and an auto-accom-
paniment style. Normally “melody” refers to the right-hand
part, but in this instrument “melody” parts are provided for
both the right and left hands. MELODY R is the melody
part played by the right hand, and MELODY L is the mel-
ody part played by the left hand.
NOTE
Track [1]—Will play back as the right-hand melody
part (MELODY R)
Track [2]—Will play back as the left-hand melody
part (MELODY L)
Tracks [3]–[5]—Will play back as “other” perfor-
mance data.
Track [A]—Will play back as the Style (auto-accom-
paniment) part.
Melody Chords
Specify
track(s) and
record
Track
1
Track
2
Track
3
Track
4
Track
5
Track
A
Right-hand
melody
Left-hand
melody
Other perfor-
mance data
Style
The parts played by each track
when a user song is played back.
Recording Procedure
031
User 1
Rotate the dial to select a song
number between 031 and 035.
Record Your Own Performance
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 53
2
Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your
selection on the display.
Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track
Together
Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-
ing the [REC] button.
Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button.
The selected tracks will flash in the display.
Record a Melody track
Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-
ing the [REC] button.
The selected track will flash in the display.
3
Recording will start when you play on the keyboard.
You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button.
The current measure will be shown on the display during recording.
4
Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC]
button.
To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a
second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off
while recording is in progress.
Style accompaniment is auto-
matically turned on when you
select the style track [A] for
recording.
Style accompaniment cannot
turned on or off while recording
is in progress.
If you use a split voice for
recording, notes played to the
left of the split point will not be
recorded.
NOTE
If you record to a track that
contains previously-recorded
data the previous data will be
overwritten and lost.
CAUTION
Press and hold
rEC
User 1
001
If style accompaniment is on
and track [A] has not yet been
recorded, the style track [A] will
automatically be selected for
recording when a melody track
is selected. If you only want to
record a melody track, be sure
to turn the style track [A] off.
NOTE
rEC
User 1
001
If the memory becomes full dur-
ing recording a warning mes-
sage will appear and recording
will stop automatically. Use the
song clear or track clear (page
55) function to delete unwanted
data and make more room avail-
able for recording, then do the
recording again.
NOTE
Recording
starts
Current measure
rEC
User 1
003
or
Record Your Own Performance
54 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style
track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will
stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to
001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will light.
5
When the recording is done ...
To Play Back a User Song
User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 39).
1 Press the [SONG] button.
2 The current song number/name will be displayed—use the dial
to select the user song (031–035) you want to play.
3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback.
To Record Other Tracks
Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks.
By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5],
[A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded
tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute
previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display)
while recording new tracks.
To Re-record a Track
Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal
way.
The new material will overwrite the previous data.
Data Recording Limitations
The split voice cannot be recorded.
The following data are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes
made during the song will not be recorded.
reverb type, chorus type, time signature, style number, style volume,
tempo
Record Your Own Performance
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 55
This function clears an entire user song (all tracks).
1
Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–
035) you want to clear.
2
Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer
than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
3
Press the [+] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.
4
Press the [+] button to clear the song.
The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while
the song is being cleared.
This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song.
1
Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031–
035) you want to clear.
2
Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5],
[A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for
longer than a second.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
3
Press the [+] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.
4
Press the [+] button to clear the track.
The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while
the track is being cleared.
Song Clear—Deleting User Songs
If you only want to clear a spe-
cific track from a user song use
the Track Clear function.
NOTE
Hold for longer
than a second
Press and hold
YES
ClrUser1
•To execute the Song Clear func-
tion press the [+] button. Press
[-] to cancel the Song Clear
operation.
NOTE
Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song
YES
ClrTr1
Hold for longer than a second
•To execute the Track Clear func-
tion press the [+] button. Press
[-] to cancel the Track Clear
operation.
NOTE
56 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Backup and Initialization
The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off.
If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below.
* Refer to “Loading Style Files” on page 74
This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default set-
tings. The following initialization procedures are provided.
Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user setting, reg-
istration memory, user songs, style file of style number 163—turn the power
on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white
key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values
restored.
Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To clear song data and style files that have been transferred to the internal flash
memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON]
switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard
and the three highest black keys.
The Backup Parameters
User Songs
Style file of style number 163*
•Touch Response on/off
•Registration Memory
FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume,
Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel,
Master EQ type, Arpeggio Velocity
Backup
Initialization
When you execute the Flash
Clear operation, song data
you have purchased will also
be cleared. Be sure to save
data you want to keep to a
computer.
CAUTION
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 57
Overall PSR-I425 control is based on the following simple operations.
1 Press a button to select a basic function.
Basic Operation
1 Press a button to select a basic function.
2 Use the dial to select an item or value.
3 Start a function.
001
001
GrandPno
Display (page 59)
Volume Adjustment
Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the
instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones
plugged into the PHONES jack.
Rotate counter-
clockwise to
decrease the
volume.
Rotate clockwise
to increase the
volume.
3 Start a function. 2 Select an item or value. 1 Select a basic function.
The “Press & Hold” Symbol
The “ ” symbol that appears next to
some buttons indicates that the button can be
pressed and held for longer than a second to
call up a related function. This provides conve-
nient direct access to a range of functions.
Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson.
Select an auto-accompaniment style.
Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard.
Basic Operation and Displays
Basic Operation and Displays
58 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
2 Use the dial to select an item or value.
When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be displayed. You can
then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item.
Changing Values● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3 Start a function.
This is the [START/STOP] button.
Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE]
button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm).
012
ForElise
This portion of the display indi-
cates the name and number of
the currently selected song,
voice and style. It also displays
the name and current setting/
value of other functions.
Dial
Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the
value of the selected item, or counter-
clockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate
the dial continuously to continuously
increase or decrease the value.
[+] and [-] Buttons
Press the [+] button briefly to incre-
ment the value by 1, or press the [-]
button briefly to decrement the value
by 1. Press and hold either button to
continuously increment or decre-
ment the value in the corresponding
direction.
Number Buttons [0]–[9]
The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number
or parameter value.
Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below).
Decrease Increase
Press
briefly to
decrement.
Press
briefly to
increment.
Press number buttons
[0], [0], [3].
Example: Song number “003”
can be entered in three ways.
[0] [0] [3]
[0] [3]
(“003” will appear on the dis-
play after a brief delay)
[3]
(“003” will appear on the dis-
play after a brief delay)
CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons
When selecting a song, style, or voice,
you can use these buttons to jump to the
first item in the next or previous category.
The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons
are useful for selecting categorized items,
as in the example below.
Example: VOICE SELECT
In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you
first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the cat-
egory containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-]
buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when
you have to select from a large number of voices.
f
r
Jump to the
first item in
the next or
previous
category.
f
r
090
SweetFlt
The first voice in the selected
category is selected.
f
r
In most procedures described throughout this owner’s
manual the dial is recommended for selection simply
because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection
method. Please note however, that most items or values
that can be selected using the dial can also be selected
using the [+] and [-] buttons.
Basic Operation and Displays
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 59
The display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice.
It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.
Display Items
001
001
GrandPno
Indicates that Touch response
is turned on. (see page 65)
Indicates that Harmony is
turned on. (see page 60)
Indicates that the Dual voice is
turned on. (see page 29)
Indicates that the Split voice is
turned on. (see page 30)
Indicates that the Arpeggio is
turned on. (see page 14)
Indicates that performance
assistant technology is turned
on. (see
page 23)
Indicates that Accompaniment
is turned on. (see page 34)
Indicates that SYNC STOP is
turned on. (see page 71)
TOUCH
HARMONY
DUAL
SPLIT
ARPEGGIO
Performance assistant technology
ACMP ON
SYNC STOP
Displays the melody and chord
notes of a song when the Song
Lesson function is in use, or the
notes of chords you specify when
the Dictionary function is in use. At
other times the notes you play on
the keyboard are displayed.
Notation
•Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indi-
cated by “8va” in the notation.
•For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in
the notation section of the display. This is due to space
limitations in the display.
NOTE
Indicates the beat number in a mea-
sure during the Metronome function.
Indicates the current measure dur-
ing playback of a song or style, and
the currently set Tempo value for the
song or style. (see page 27)
Indicates the name of the chord cur-
rently being played back, or the
name of the chord being played on
the keyboard.
Information related to the song tracks is shown here. (see
page 52, 79)
BEAT number and MEASURE
Chord Display
Song Track Display
001
Indicates the current style or song
beat with flashing arrows. (see page
27)
This display allows you to visually
confirm parameters assigned to the
knobs. (see page 18)
Beat Display
Knob Assign Display
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
60 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Adding Effects
This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice.
1
Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button
to turn Harmony feature on.
To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY
ON/OFF] button again.
When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF]
button to turn this feature on, the appropriate
harmony type for the currently selected main
voice is automatically selected.
2
Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/
OFF] button for longer than a second so
that the Harmony Type item appears.
“HarmType” appears in the display for a few
seconds, and the currently selected harmony
type will be displayed. Use the dial to select a
different harmony type.
3
Use the dial to select a harmony type.
Refer to the Effect Type List on page 119 for
information about the available harmony types.
Try playing the keyboard with the harmony
function. The effect and operation of each Har-
mony Type is different-refer to the below sec-
tion “How to sound each Harmony Type” as
well as the Effect Type List for details.
Harmony
When harmony is on the
harmony icon will appear
in the display.
02
Trio
HarmType
The currently selected harmony type
Hold for longer
than a second.
The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual
or Split Voices.
The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony
notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit).
NOTE
How to sound each Harmony Type
Harmony type 01 to 05
Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill)
Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the
auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when
the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 34).
Hold down two keys.
Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo)
Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo)
You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the
Function Settings (page 69).
Keep holding down the keys.
Keep holding down the keys.
Reference
Adding Effects
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 61
Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum
reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the
procedure described below.
1
Press the [FUNCTON] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons
to select the Reverb Type item.
“Reverb” appears in the display for a few sec-
onds, and the currently selected reverb type
will be displayed.
3
Use the dial to select a reverb type.
You can check how the selected reverb type
sounds by playing on the keyboard.
Refer to the Effect Type List on page 119 for
information about the available reverb types.
Adjusting the Reverb Send Level
You can individually adjust the amount of reverb
that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.
See page 83).
Adding Reverb
100
StyleVol
f
r
02
Hall2
The currently selected reverb type
Reverb
03
Hall3
Selected reverb type
62 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Adding Effects
The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison.
When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If
you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below.
1
Press the [FUNCTON] button.
2
Use the
CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons
to select the Chorus Type item.
“Chorus” appears in the display for a few sec-
onds, and the currently selected chorus type
will be displayed.
3
Use the dial to select a chorus type.
You can check how the selected chorus type
sounds by playing on the keyboard.
Refer to the Effect Type List on page 119 for
information about the available chorus types.
Adjusting the Chorus Send Level
You can individually adjust the amount of chorus
that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.
See page 83).
Adding Chorus
f
r
1
Chorus1
Chorus
The currently selected chorus type
2
Chorus2
Selected chorus type
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 63
Handy Performance Features
The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature.
Use it to set the tempo that is most comfortable for you.
Start the metronome ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Turn the metronome on and start it by
pressing the [METRONOME ON/OFF]
button.
To stop the metronome, press the [METRO-
NOME ON/OFF] button again.
Adjusting the Metronome
Tempo
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call
up the tempo setting.
2
Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to
280.
The Metronome
001
1
GrandPno
1
Indicates the beat number
in the measure
090
Tempo
Current Tempo setting
64 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Handy Performance Features
In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.
1
Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/
OFF] button for longer than a second to
select the number of beats per measure
function “TimesigN”.
2
Use the dial to select the number of
beats per measure.
A chime will sound on the first beat of each
measure while the other beats will click. All
beats will simply click with no chime at the
beginning of each measure if you set this
parameter to “00”.
The available range is from 0 through 60.
Select 5 for this example.
3
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons as many times as necessary to
select the beat length function
“TimesigD”.
The currently selected beat length will be dis-
played.
4
Use the dial to select the beat length.
Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8,
or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or
16
th
note). Select 8 for this example.
1
Press the [FUNCTON] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Metronome Volume
item.
3
Use the dial to set the metronome vol-
ume as required.
Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat
Number of beats per measure.
04
TimesigN
Hold for longer than
a second.
The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song
that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style
or song is playing.
NOTE
f
r
04
TimesigD
The length of one beat.
Adjusting the Metronome Volume
f
r
Metronome
volume
100
MtrVol
Handy Performance Features
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 65
You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at
any tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected style/
song will begin playing at the tapped tempo.
When touch response is on you can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps.
1
Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to
turn touch response on.
The touch response icon will appear in the dis-
play when touch response is on (page 59).
2
Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF]
button for longer than a second so that
the Touch Sensitivity item appears.
“TouchSns” appears in the display for a few
seconds, and the currently selected touch sensi-
tivity will be displayed.
3
Use the dial in response to keyboard
dynamics to select a touch sensitivity
setting between 1 and 3. Higher values
produce greater (easier) volume varia-
tion in response to keyboard dynam-
ics—i.e. greater sensitivity.
Tap Start
Touch Response Sensitivity
001
GrandPno
Touch response icon
TouchSns
Hold for longer
than a second.
Touch Sensitivity
2
Medium
The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”.
NOTE
66 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Handy Performance Features
The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll
the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a voice
such as the “040 Overdriven” guitar voice, you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending effects.
Large Pitch Changes (Transpose)
The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted
up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone
increments.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Transpose item.
3
Use the dial to set the transpose value
between -12 and +12 as required.
Small Pitch Changes (Tuning)
The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted
up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent
increments (100 cents = 1 semitone).
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Tuning item.
3
Use the dial to set the tuning value
between -100 and +100 as required.
Pitch Bend
Pitch Controls
f
r
00
Transpos
The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.
NOTE
f
r
000
Tuning
The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.
NOTE
Handy Performance Features
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 67
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons as many times as necessary to
select the arpeggio velocity function
“ARP Velo”.
ARP Velo” will be shown in the display for a
few seconds, then the currently selected arpeg-
gio velocity setting will appear.
3
Use the dial to select “2 Thru”.
When “1 Original” is selected the arpeggio vol-
ume is the same regardless of changes in key-
board velocity.
Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics
f
r
1
Original
The currently selected
arpeggio velocity.
ARP Velo
68 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Handy Performance Features
Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting
feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select
voice number “000” to activate this feature.
1
Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2
on page 28).
2
Select and play back any song (steps 1
to 3 on page 39).
3
Play the keyboard and remember the
sound of the voice.
If you have stopped playback at some point
during this procedure press the [START/STOP]
button to start playback again.
4
Use the dial to change songs, then play
the keyboard and listen to the voice.
You should hear a different keyboard voice
than you played in step 3. Press the [VOICE]
button after changing songs to see the name of
the voice being used.
One Touch Setting
000
SweetSpr
Use the dial to select voice number 000.
Handy Performance Features
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 69
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Harmony Volume
item.
3
Use the dial to set the harmony volume
between 000 and 127.
Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listen-
ing through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external
speaker system.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
The currently selected function will appear in
the display.
2
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons as many times as necessary to
select the master EQ type function
“MasterEQ”.
“MasterEQ” will be shown in the display for a
few seconds, then the currently selected EQ
type will appear.
3
Use the dial to select the desired Master
EQ setting.
Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and
2 are best for listening via the instrument’s
built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones,
and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via
external speakers.
Adjusting the Harmony Volume
f
r
080
HarmVol
Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound
f
r
1
Speakerl
MasterEQ
The currently selected
master EQ type.
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
70 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 33 of
the Quick Guide.
Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment proce-
dure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more.
The PSR-I425 features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the
accompaniment to match the song you are playing.
INTRO section
This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main sec-
tion. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.
MAIN section
This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely
until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style
playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand.
Fill-in section
This is automatically added before changing to section A or B.
ENDING section
This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically.
The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.
1
Press the [STYLE] button and then
select a style.
2
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to
turn auto accompaniment on.
3
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn
synchro start on.
Pattern Variation (Sections)
Main A/BIntro
Auto fillEnding
Appears when Auto
Accompaniment is on.
Synchro Start
When the synchro start standby mode is engaged,
style playback will begin as soon as you play a
chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.
You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode
by pressing the [SYNC START] button again.
Beat arrows will flash when
the synchro start standby
mode is engaged
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 71
4
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.
5
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
You’re now ready to play the intro.
6
As soon as you play a chord with your
left hand, the Intro of the selected Style
starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as
shown below). For information on how to enter
chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment
Chords” on page 38.
7
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.
When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly
into the selected main section A/B.
8
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
This switches to the ending section.
When the ending is finished, the auto accompa-
niment stops automatically. You can have the
ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by
pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button
again while the ending is playing back.
MAIN A
The name of the selected section—
MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed.
INTRO≥A
Accompaniment
range
Split point
FILL A≥B
Synchro Stop
When this function is selected the accompaniment
style will only play while you are playing chords
in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.
Style playback will stop when you release the
keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC
STOP] button.
ENDING
Appears when the syn-
chro-stop function is
engaged.
The style will play
while you are playing
the keys
Style playback will
stop when you
release the keys
72 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
Press the [STYLE] button to engage the
style function.
1
Press the [FUNCTON] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Style Volume item.
3
Use the dial to set the style volume
between 000 and 127.
The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the
procedure described below.
1
Press the [STYLE] button.
2
Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] for
longer than a second so that the Split
point item appears.
3
Use the dial to set the split point to any
key from 000 through 127.
Adjusting the Style Volume
f
r
100
StyleVol
Setting the Split Point
054
SplitPnt
Hold for longer than a second
Split point
Split point (54 : F#2)
Main voice
Split voice
When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point
also changes.
The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson.
NOTE
•You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION]
button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the
item (page 82).
f
r
NOTE
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 73
When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play
chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the
accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the
instrument can be used (page 38).
Press the [STYLE] button to engage the
style function, then press the [ACMP ON/
OFF] button to turn the auto accompani-
ment on.
Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)
104
PopBossa
Appears when auto accompaniment is on
Accompaniment
range
74 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
This instrument features 162 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and
others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be loaded into style
number 163 and used in the same way as the internal styles.
In order to use the style file load function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to
the instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page
89 (“Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument”).
The procedure described below loads a style file that has already been transferred from a computer to the
instrument into style number 163.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
The currently selected function will appear in
the display.
2
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons as many times as necessary to
select the style file load function “Sff
Load”.
After about 2 seconds the name of a loadable
style file will appear in the display.
If multiple loadable style files have been trans-
ferred to the instrument, you can use the dial or
the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in
sequence.
3
Execute the load operation.
With the name of the style file you want to load
shown in the display, press the number [0] but-
ton.
4
A confirmation message for the load
operation will appear. Press the [+/YES]
button to actually load the file.
Loading Style Files
f
r
Sff Load
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 75
Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”.
The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the
root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad,
for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the
C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale).
In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the
chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for
the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and
anchors the other chord notes.
The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third.
The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad
is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two addi-
tional chords, as shown below.
The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create
different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by
choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”).
Reading Chord Names
Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord
(other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the
chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a
major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance.
Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the PSR-I425.)
Chord Basics
3rd
3rd
Root
Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones)
CM Cm Caug Cdim
Major chord
Minor 3rd
Major 3rd
Major 3rd
Minor 3rd
Major 3rd
Major 3rd
Minor 3rd
Minor 3rd
Minor chord Augmented chord Diminished chord
Cm
Root note Chord type
Csus4 C7 Cm7 CM7
C7
(
b5
)
Cm7
(
b5
)
C7sus4
CmM7
Perfect 5
th
Perfect 4
th
Flatted 7
th
Major chord Flatted 7
th
Minor chord Major 7
th
Major chord
Major 7
th
Minor chord Flatted 5
th
7
th
chord
Flatted 5
th
Minor 7
th
chord
Flatted 7
th
Suspended
4
th
chord
Suspended 4
th
7
th
Minor 7
th
Major 7
th
7
th
, suspended 4
th
Minor 7
th
, flatted 5
th
7
th
, flatted 5
th
Minor/major 7
th
76 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
Recognized Standard Chords● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords.
* These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function.
Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display
Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C
Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C
(9)
Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6
Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6
(9)
*
Major seventh [M7]
1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - 7
CM7
Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7
(9)
*
Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7
CM7
(#11)
*
Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C
b5
*
Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7
b5
*
Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4
Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug
Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug *
Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm
Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm
(9)
Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6
Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7
Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7
(9)
Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7
(11)
*
Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7
Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7
(9)
*
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7
b5
Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7
b5
*
Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim
Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7
Seventh [7]
1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - b7
C7
Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7
(b9)
Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7C7
(b13)
Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7
(9)
Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7
C7
(#11)
Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7C7
(13)
Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7
(#9)
Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7
b5
*
Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4
One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1 - 2 - 5 C *
C
C
(
9
)
C6
(
9
)
C6
CM7
CM7
(
9
)
CM7
(
#11
)
C
(
b5
)
CM7
(
b5
)
Csus4
Caug
CM7aug
Cm
(
9
)
Cm
Cm6
Cm7
Cm7
(
9
)
Cm7
(
11
)
CmM7
CmM7
(
9
)
Cm7
(
b5
)
CmM7
(
b5
)
Cdim
Cdim7
C7
C7
(
b9
)
C7
(
b13
)
(
9
)
C7
(
#11
)
C7
(
13
)
C7
(
#9
)
C7
C7b5
C7aug
C7sus4
C1+2+5
Notes in parentheses can be omitted.
Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompa-
niment based only on the root.
•A perfect fifth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root
and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords.
The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions
can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7
b
5, 6, m6, sus4,
aug, dim7, 7
b
5, 6(9), 1+2+5.
NOTE
•Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the
notes shown in parentheses are omitted.
The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related
chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the
minor seventh).
•Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played
chord.
NOTE
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 77
The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords.
It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.
1
Press and hold the LESSON [START]
button for longer than a second.
2
As an example, we’ll learn how to play a
GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the
“G” key in the section of the keyboard
labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t
sound.) The root note you set is shown
in the display.
3
Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in
the section of the keyboard labeled
“CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t
sound.) The notes you should play for
the specified chord (root note and
chord type) are shown in the display,
both as notation and in the keyboard
diagram.
To call up possible inversions of the chord,
press the [+]/[-] buttons.
4
Try playing a chord in the auto accom-
paniment section of the keyboard,
checking the indications in the display.
When you’ve played the chord properly,
a bell sound signals your success and
the chord name in the display flash.
Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary
Dict.
Hold for longer than
a second
001
Dict.
001
Dict.
Notation of chord
Chord name (root and type)
Individual notes of chord (keyboard)
About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only
by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when
specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after
pressing the root note.
NOTE
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
78 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Song Settings
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Song Volume item.
3
Use the dial to set the song volume
between 000 and 127.
You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the
start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat
playback.
1
Play the song (page 39) and press the
[A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning
of the section you want to repeat (the
“A” point).
2
Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec-
ond time at the end of the section you
want to repeat (the “B” point).
3
The specified A-B section of the song
will now play repeatedly.
You can stop repeat playback at any time by
pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.
Song Volume
f
r
100
SongVol
Song volume
Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected.
NOTE
A-B Repeat
AB
The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure
increments.
The current measure number is shown in the display during play-
back.
If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song
press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song.
NOTE
Song Settings
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 79
Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the
song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc.
You can mute individual tracks and play the muted
part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute
tracks other than the ones you want to listen to.
Use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons
to mute or un-mute the corresponding tracks. The
track number in the display disappears when that
track is muted. Refer to page 52 for information
about the song track configuration.
You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer.
1
Select the song and play it.
2
Rotate the dial to select the voice you
want to listen to after pressing the
[VOICE] button.
3
Press the [VOICE] button for longer
than a second.
“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the
display for a few seconds, indicating
that the voice selected in step #2 has
replaced the song’s original melody
voice.
Muting Independent Song Parts
Track number on—Track will playback
Track number off—Track is muted or
contains no data
Change the Melody Voice
•You cannot change the melody voice of a user song.
NOTE
050
Strings
SONG MEL
Hold for longer than
a second
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
80 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings
This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite set-
tings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved
(8 banks of two setups each).
1
Set the panel controls as required—
select a voice, accompaniment style,
etc.
2
Press the [] (MEMORY/BANK) button.
A bank number will appear in the dis-
play when you release the button.
3
Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-
tons to select a bank number from 1 to
8.
4
Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2]
button while holding the [] (MEMORY/
BANK) button to store the current panel
settings to the specified registration
memory.
8 Banks
Memory 1
Up to 16 presets (eight
banks of two each) can be
memorized.
Memory 2
Saving to the Registration Memory
1
Bank
Bank number
Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song play-
back.
NOTE
Writing!
If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains
data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data.
NOTE
Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registra-
tion memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost.
CAUTION
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 81
1
Press the [] (MEMORY/BANK) button.
A bank number will appear in the dis-
play when you release the button.
2
Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-
tons to select bank you want to recall.
3
Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1]
or [2], containing the settings you want
to recall. The recalled REGIST MEMORY
number appears in the display for a few
seconds. The panel controls will be
instantly set accordingly.
Recalling a Registration Memory
Bank number
1
Bank
REGIST 1
1
Settings That Can be Saved to the Registra-
tion Memory
Style settings*
Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF,
Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B),
Style Volume, Tempo
Voice settings
Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume,
Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Attack Time,
Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance,
Chorus Send Level), Dual Voice settings
(Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave,
Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level,
Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter
Resonance), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF,
Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan,
Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level)
Effect settings
Reverb Type, Chorus Type
Arpeggio settings
Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio ON/OFF
Harmony settings
Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type,
Harmony Volume
Other settings
Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Assign
* Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when
using the Song features.
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
82 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
The Functions
The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tun-
ing, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the func-
tion list starting on the opposite page. There are 54 function parameters in all.
When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display
name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required.
1
Find the function you want to set in the
list that begins on page 83.
2
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
3
Select a function.
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as
many times as necessary until the function’s
display name appears in the display.
4
Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or
the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the
selected function as required.
The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/
OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF.
In some cases the [+] button will initiate execu-
tion of the selected function, and the [-] will
cancel the selection.
Some function settings are stored in memory as
soon as they are changed. See “The Backup
Parameters” on page 56 for information on the
function settings that are stored on the instru-
ment. To restore all initial factor default set-
tings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure
described in the “Initialization” section on page
56.
Selecting and Setting Functions
100
StyleVol
f
r
00
Transpos
The selected function.
Direct numeric
entry.
Increment value by 1.
•ON
•Execute
Decrement value by 1.
OFF
Cancel
Press simultaneously to
recall the default setting.
The Functions
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 83
Function Setting List
Setting Item title Range/Settings Description
Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.
Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.
Transpose Transpos -12–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments.
Tuning Tuning -100–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.
Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments.
Split Point SplitPnt
000–127
(C-2–G8)
Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—
in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper)
voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are
automatically set to the same value.
Touch Sensitivity TouchSns
1(Soft),
2(Medium),
3(Hard)
When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the
feature.
Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice.
Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice.
Main Voice Pan M.Pan
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)
Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”
results in the sound being panned full right.
Main Voice Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127
Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb
effect.
Main Voice Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127
Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus
effect.
Main Voice Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 Sets the Main voice attack time.
Main Voice Release Time M.Releas 000–127 Sets the Main voice release time.
Main Voice Filter Cutoff M.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter cutoff frequency.
Main Voice Filter
Resonance
M.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter resonance.
Dual Voice D.Voice 001–514 Selects the Dual voice.
Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice.
Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice.
Dual Voice Pan D.Pan
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)
Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”
results in the sound being panned full right.
Dual Voice Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127
Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb
effect.
Dual Voice Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127
Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus
effect.
Dual Voice Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 Sets the Dual voice attack time.
Dual Voice Release Time D.Releas 000–127 Sets the Dual voice release time.
Dual Voice Filter Cutoff D.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter cutoff frequency.
Dual Voice Filter
Resonance
D.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter resonance.
Split Voice S.Voice 001–514 Selects the Split voice.
Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice.
Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice.
Split Voice Pan S.Pan
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)
Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”
results in the sound being panned full right.
Split Voice Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127
Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb
effect.
Split Voice Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127
Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus
effect.
84 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
The Functions
* All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is
Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.)
Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list on page 119)
Chorus Type Chorus 01–05 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list on page 119)
Master EQ Type MasterEQ
Speaker1,
Speaker2,
Headphone,
Line Out1,
Line Out2
Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in
different listening situations.
Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 119)
Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.
Arpeggio Type ARP Type 01–62 Determines the Arpeggio type. (See the list on page 14)
Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo
1 (Original),
2 (Thru)
Sets the velocity mode for arpeggio playback.
Style File Load Sff Load 001–nnn Loads a Style file.
PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 88).
Local On/Off Local ON/OFF
Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone
generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 87)
External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF
Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock
(OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 87)
Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF
Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is
transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).
Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF
Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)
during Style playback.
Song Out SongOut ON/OFF
Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)
during Song playback.
Initial Send InitSend YES/NO
Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to
send, or press [-] to cancel.
Time Signature
Numerator
TimesigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.
Time Signature
Denominator
TimesigD
Half note,
Quarter note,
Eighth note,
Sixteenth note
Sets the length of each metronome beat.
Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.
Lesson Track (R) R-Part
GuideTrack
1–16
Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The
setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a
computer.
Lesson Track (L) L-Part
GuideTrack
1–16
Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting
is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer.
Grade Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.
Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF
Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to
ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed.
Setting Item title Range/Settings Description
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 85
Connecting to a Computer
Nearly all of the electronic musical instruments made today—particularly synthesizers,
sequencers and computer music related devices—use MIDI. MIDI is a worldwide stan-
dard that allows these devices to send and receive performance and setting data. Natu-
rally, this instrument lets you save or send your keyboard performance as MIDI data, as
well as the songs, styles and panel settings.
The potential MIDI holds for your live performances and music creation/production is
enormous—simply by connecting this instrument to a computer and transmitting MIDI
data. In this section, you’ll learn the basics of MIDI and the specific MIDI functions pro-
vided by this instrument.
No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic
instrument” and “digital instrument”. In the world
today, these are the two main categories of instru-
ments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical
guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They
are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a
key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and
plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a
string and the note sounds. But how does a digital
instrument go about playing a note?
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic
instrument the sampling note (previously recorded
note) stored in the tone generator section (elec-
tronic circuit) is played based on information
received from the keyboard. So then what is the
information from the keyboard that becomes the
basis for note production?
For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note
using the grand piano sound on the instrument.
Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a reso-
nated note, the electronic instrument puts out infor-
mation from the keyboard such as “with what
voice”, “with which key”, “about how strong”,
“when was it pressed”, and “when was it released”.
Then each piece of information is changed into a
number value and sent to the tone generator. Using
these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays
the stored sampling note.
Example of Keyboard Information
Your keyboard performance and all panel opera-
tions of this instrument are processed as MIDI
data. The songs, auto accompaniment (styles), and
User songs are also made up of MIDI data.
MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instru-
ment Digital Interface and it allows different musi-
cal instruments and devices to instantly
communicate with each other, via digital data. The
MIDI standard is used all over the world and was
designed to transmit performance data between
electronic musical instruments (or computers).
Thanks to MIDI, you can control one instrument
from another and transmit performance data
between the devices-taking your creative and per-
formance potential to even higher levels.
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups:
Channel messages and System messages.
What Is MIDI?
Acoustic guitar note production
Pluck a string and the body
resonates the sound.
Digital instrument note production
Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note
stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers.
Playing the keyboard
Tone Generator
(Electronic circuit)
LR
Sampling
Note
Sampling
Note
Voice number (with what voice) 1 (grand piano)
Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)
Note on (when was it pressed) and
note off (when was it released)
Timing expressed
numerically (quarter note)
Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)
86 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Connecting to a Computer
Channel Messages
This instrument is capable of handling 16 MIDI
channels simultaneously—meaning it can play up
to sixteen different instruments at the same time.
Channel messages transmit information such as
Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16
channels.
System Messages
This is data that is used in common by the entire
MIDI system. System messages include messages
like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique
to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime
Messages that control the MIDI device.
The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer.
Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 87).
Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 89).
The connection procedure is as follows:
1
Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com-
puter.
The USB–MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM.
Installation of the USB MIDI driver is described on
page 92.
2
Connect the USB terminal of the computer
to the USB terminal on the instrument using
a standard USB cable (USB cable sold sep-
arately).
The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft
Downloader application that allows you to transfer
song files from your computer to the instrument’s
flash memory. For instructions about how to install
Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song
files, see page 90.
USB Precautions
Please observe the following precautions when
connecting the instrument to a computer via a USB
cable.
Failure to do so can cause the instrument and/or the
computer to hang up (freeze), possibly causing cor-
ruption or loss of data.
If the instrument or computer does hang up, turn
the power to both devices off and then on again,
and restart the computer.
Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting
Note ON/OFF
Performance data of the keyboard (contains
note number and velocity data)
Program Change
Instrument selection (including bank select
MSB/LSB, if necessary)
Control Change Instrument settings (volume, pan, etc.)
Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting
Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus settings, etc.
Realtime Messages Start/stop operation
Connecting a Personal Computer
USB cable
PSR-I425
•Wake the computer from a sleep/suspended/standby mode before
connecting the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable to the instrument and computer before
turning power to the instrument on.
Check the following points before turning the instrument’s power
on or off, and before plugging or unplugging the USB cable.
Quit all applications.
Make sure that no data transfer is in progress (data is trans-
ferred whenever you play on the keyboard or play a song).
Allow at least 6 seconds between turning the instrument’s power
on and off, and between plugging and unplugging the USB cable.
Directly connect the instrument to the computer using a single
USB cable. Do not use a USB hub.
CAUTION
The Musicsoft Downloader application may not be able to access the
instrument in the following cases:
During style playback.
During song playback.
NOTE
Connecting to a Computer
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 87
By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the com-
puter, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.
When the instrument is connected with computer,
it transmits/receives performance data.
MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons
to select the item you want to change its
value.
3
Use the dial to select ON or OFF.
Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer
USB cable
USB terminalUSB terminal
PSR-I425
Item Range/Settings Description
Local ON/OFF
Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal
tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when
local control is off.
External Clock ON/OFF
These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to
a clock signal from an external device (ON).
Keyboard Out ON/OFF
These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or
not (OFF).
Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback.
Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Song data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback.
If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely
may be caused by Local Control being set to off.
CAUTION
If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from
an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will
not start.
CAUTION
f
r
88 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Connecting to a Computer
PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
A number of MIDI settings need to be made when
you want to transfer performance data between the
computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item
can conveniently make multiple settings for you in
one operation. Three settings are available: PC1,
PC2, and OFF.
This setting is not necessary when transferring
song or backup files between the computer and the
instrument.
* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Note-
book.
1
Press and hold the [DEMO] button for
longer than a second so that the PC
Mode item appears.
2
Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.
You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on
your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the key-
board.
Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To use the remote control functions, simulta-
neously hold down the lowest two keys on the key-
board (C1 and C#1) and press the appropriate key
(shown below).
PC1 PC2* OFF
Local OFF OFF ON
External Clock ON OFF OFF
Song Out OFF OFF OFF
Style Out OFF OFF OFF
Keyboard Out OFF ON ON
oFF
PC mode
When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo,
song recording, and lesson features cannot be used.
NOTE
•You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNC-
TION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to
locate it (page 82).
f
r
NOTE
Remote Control of MIDI Devices
C1
C#1
C6: Fast forward
B5: Start
A5: Stop
G5: Rewind
F5: Top (move to the beginning
of the song)
E5: Metronome ON/OFF
Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2
mode.
NOTE
Connecting to a Computer
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 89
This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a
sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup
data before the actual performance data.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY
[] and [ ]
buttons
to select the Initial Send item.
3
Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO]
to cancel.
MIDI songs residing on a computer, as well as the
70 MIDI songs and 5 Style files provided on the
CD-ROM, can be transferred to the instrument.
Backup files can also be transferred from the
instrument to the computer and back. Songs and
styles transferred to the instrument can be used
with the instrument’s lesson and other functions.
In order to transfer songs between your computer
and the instrument you will need to install the
Musicsoft Downloader application and the USB-
MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM
on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CD-
ROM Installation Guide on page 92 for installation
details.
With the Musicsoft
Downloader You Can.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Transfer MIDI songs you have downloaded
from the Internet or created on your computer
from the computer to the instrument’s flash
memory.
refer to the procedure described on
page 90.
The procedure for transferring songs included
on the Accessory CD-ROM from your com-
puter to the instrument is given as an example.
Initial Send
f
r
Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument
Data that can be transferred from a computer
to this instrument.
• Song Capacity (max.): Flash memory 99 songs
(Song 036–)
• Data Capacity: Flash memory 373 kb
• Data Format: SMF format 0,
style file (extension: .sty),
Backup File (06PK61.BUP)
What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?
The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the
most common and widely compatible sequence
formats used for storing sequence data. There are
two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large
number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF
Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI
sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.
90 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Connecting to a Computer
Backup files can be transferred from the instru-
ment to a computer and back.
refer to the procedure described on
page 91.
Use Musicsoft Downloader
To Transfer Songs From the
Accessory CD-ROM To the
Instrument’s flash memory
● ● ● ● ●
1
Install the Musicsoft Downloader and
USB MIDI driver to your computer, then
connect the computer and the instru-
ment (page 94).
2
Insert the included CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive.
A start window will appear automatically.
3
Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader
shortcut icon that is created on the
desktop.
This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader
application and the main window will appear.
4
Click the “Add File” button and the Add
File window will appear.
5
Click the button to the right of Look in”
and select the CD-ROM drive from the drop-
down menu that appears. Double-click the
“SongData” Folder on the window. Select
the file you want to transfer to the instru-
ment, and click “Open”.
6
A copy of the selected MIDI song file
will appear in the “List of files stored
temporarily” at the top of the window.
The memory medium will also be displayed at
the bottom of the window to specify the desti-
nation for the transfer. Click the “Electronic
Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash mem-
ory.
7
After selecting the file in the “List of
files stored temporarily”, click the
downward [Move] button and a confir-
mation message will appear. Click [OK]
and the song will be transferred from
the “List of files stored temporarily” to
the instrument’s memory.
Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with
Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.
If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding.
NOTE
The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader
is running.
NOTE
q Click the CD-ROM drive
w Double-click “SongData” Folder and
click a song file.
e Click “Open”
q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”,
and then “Flash Memory”
Connecting to a Computer
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 91
8
Close the window to end the Musicsoft
Downloader.
9
To playback a song stored in flash
memory, press the [SONG] button.
Use the dial to select the song you want
to play, then press the [START/STOP]
button to start playback.
Style files (files with the “.STY” extension) can
be transferred to Flash memory using the same
procedure as described above. Style files trans-
ferred to the Flash Memory can be loaded into
style number 163 and then played (page 74).
Transfer a backup file from
the instrument to a computer
● ● ●
You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer
“Backup Files” containing backup data (page 56),
including the five User Songs stored on the instru-
ment, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musi-
cal Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader
display, and then “System Drive”, a file named
“06PK61.BUP” will appear in the lower right cor-
ner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is
the backup file. For details about how to transmit
backup file using the Musicsoft Downloader appli-
cation, refer to the Online help in the application.
To Use transferred Songs For Lessons...
In order to use songs (only SMF format 0)
transferred from a computer for lessons it is
necessary to specify which channels are to be
played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts.
1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song
(036–) residing in flash memory for which you
want to set the guide track.
2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.
3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to
select the R-Part or L-Part item.
4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to
play back as the specified right- or left-hand
part.
We recommend that you select channel 1 for the
right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.
End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the song transferred
from your computer.
NOTE
Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only
will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the
memory media may become unstable and its contents may dis-
appear completely when the power is turned on or off.
CAUTION
Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or
improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a
copy of all important data stored on your computer.
•We recommend that you use a power adaptor rather than bat-
teries when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the
batteries fail during the transfer.
CAUTION
f
r
Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument.
NOTE
The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmitted/
received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will be over-
written every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when
transferring data.
CAUTION
Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so, it will
not be recognized when transferred to the instrument.
CAUTION
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
92 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
This CD-ROM is copy-protected. Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to any problems
while attempting to copy the CD-ROM or software and cannot be held responsible for the results of attempts to
copy the data.
The software and this owner’s manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.
Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon
breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of
this manual before installing the application.)
Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden
without the written consent of the manufacturer.
•Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and can-
not be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software.
This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.).
Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer.
Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be
announced separately.
The screen displays as illustrated in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat
different from the screens which appear on your computer.
Data Types
This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 94 for software installation instructions.
Operating System (OS)
The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Important Notices about the CD-ROM
Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on an audio CD player. The
result high-volume noise can potentially cause hearing damage or
damage your CD player and speakers.
CAUTION
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 93
In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer.
You can download the Adobe Reader. Please check the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/
You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft Downloader, Digital Music Notebook and USB-MIDI Driver at the following website.
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
Using the CD-ROM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Please read the Software License Agreement on
page 98 before opening the CD-ROM package.
1
Check the system requirements to
make sure that the software will run on
your computer.
2
Insert the included CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive.
The start window should appear automatically.
3
Install the USB MIDI driver to the com-
puter.
Refer to “Installing the USB-MIDI Driver” on
page 94 for installation and setup instructions.
4
Connect the instrument to the com-
puter.
The connection procedure is described on page
86.
5
Install the software.
Musicsoft Downloader:
See page 96.
6
Launch the software.
For further software operation refer to the online
help supplied with the software.
Refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 97 when
you have trouble with installing the driver.
CD-ROM Contents
q
e
wr
Folder Name Application / Data Name Contents
q
MSD_ Musicsoft Downloader
This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet and
transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory.
w
DMN_FlashDemo Flash Demo
Digital Music Notebook is an educational content that lets you enjoy music while
learning.
Full motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital Music
Notebook.
DMN_DemoSong Demo Song
You can experience Digital Music Notebook functions with the demo song. You need
to download and install Digital Music Notebook on your computer prior to using the
demo song.
e
SongBook Song Book
Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as well as
70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs 1–11, and song
20 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual
beginning on page 100.
r
USB-MIDI Driver
(Windows 98/Me)
This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer via
USB.
USBdrv2k
USB-MIDI Driver
(Windows 2000/XP)
SongData MIDI 70 songs
These songs can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the
instrument’s functions.
StyleData 5 style files
These styles can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the
instrument’s functions.
94 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
You can confirm the latest system requirements at the following website.
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
Installing the USB-MIDI Driver
● ● ● ●
In order to be able to communicate with and use
MIDI devices connected to your computer, the
appropriate driver software must be properly
installed on your computer.
The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software
and similar applications on your computer to trans-
mit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI
devices via a USB cable.
Windows 98/Me installation page 95.
Windows 2000 installation page 95.
Windows XP installation page 96.
System Requirements
Application/Data OS CPU Memory Hard Disk Display
Musicsoft Downloader
Windows 98SE/Me/2000/
XP Home Edition/
XP Professional
233 MHz or higher; Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
processor family
64 MB or more
(256 MB or more
is recommended)
at least 128 MB of
free space (at least
512 MB of free
space is
recommended)
800 x 600
HighColor
(16-bit)
USB Driver for Windows
98/Me
Windows 98/Me
166 MHz or higher; Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
processor family
32 MB or more
(64 MB or more is
recommended)
at least 2 MB of free
space
USB Driver for Windows
2000/XP
Windows 2000/XP Home
Edition/XP Professional
Digital Music Notebook
Windows
®
XP
Professional Edition,
SP1a more
Windows
®
XP Home
Edition, SP1a more
Windows 2000
Professional, SP4 more
400MHz or higher; Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
Processor family (1GHz
or more is recommended)
128 MB or more
(256 MB or more
is recommended)
at least 50 MB of
free space
1024 x 768
HighColor
(16-bit)
Digital Music Notebook
(Requirements for
playing content with
video included.)
1GHz or higher; Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
Processor family (1.4GHz
or more is recommended)
256 MB or more
Software Installation
Uninstall (Removing the Software)
Installed software can be removed from your
computer as follows:
From the Windows Start menu select Start
Settings Control panel Add or Remove
Applications Install and Uninstall. Select the
item you want to remove and click [Add or
Remove]. Follow the on-screen instructions to
remove the selected software.
The actual names of the menu items and buttons will depend on
the OS version you are using.
NOTE
Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you
will be using (D:, E:, Q: etc.) The drive name is
displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My
Computer” folder. The root directory of the CD-
ROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively.
Driver
USB
Cable
MIDI device
Computer
Sequence
software
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 95
Installing the driver on Windows 98/Me
1
Start the computer.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive. A start window will appear
automatically.
3
First, make sure the POWER switch on
the instrument is set to OFF, then use a
USB cable to connect the USB terminal of
the computer to the USB connector of the
instrument. When the instrument is
turned on, the computer automatically
displays the “Add New Hardware Wizard.
Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in
the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation
Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual.
For Windows Me users, check the radio button to
the left of “Automatic search for a better driver
(Recommended)” and click [Next]. The system
automatically starts searching and installing the
driver. Proceed to Step 8. If the system does not
detect the driver, select “Specify the location of
the driver (Advanced)” and specify the CD-ROM
drive’s root directory to install the driver and click
[Next]. Execute the installation by following the
onscreen instructions and proceed to Step 8.
4
Click [Next].
The window enables you to select the search
method.
5
Check the radio button to the left of
“Search for the best driver for your
device. (Recommended)”. Click [Next].
The window enables you to select a location in
which to install the driver.
6
Check the “Specify a location” box, click
“Browse..”, then specify the root direc-
tory of the CD-ROM drive and continue
the installation. (The CD-ROM drive letter
may vary depending on your computer’s
configuration.
7
When the system detects the driver on
the CD-ROM and is ready for installation,
a message is shown on the screen. Make
sure that the “YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver”
is listed, and click [Next]. The system
starts the installation.
8
When installation is complete, a message
indicating so appears. Click [Finish].
The driver has been installed.
Installing the driver on Windows 2000
1
Start the computer and use the “Adminis-
trator” account to log into Windows.
2
Select [My Computer] [Control Panel]
[System] [Hardware] [Driver Sign-
ing] [File Signature Verification], and
check the radio button to the left of
“Ignore—Install all files, regardless of file
signature” and click [OK].
3
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive. A start window will appear
automatically.
4
First, make sure the POWER switch on
the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a
USB cable to connect the MIDI device to
the computer. After making the connec-
tions, turn on the power of the MIDI
device. The system automatically
launches the Found New Hardware Wiz-
ard.
Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the
“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section
of the Owner’s Manual.
Click [Next]. (Some computers may take a while
to display the Wizard window.)
5
Select the radio button for “Search for a
suitable driver for my device [recom-
mended]”, then click [Next].
6
Check the “CD-ROM drives” check box,
deselect all other check boxes, then click
[Next].
7
Deselect the “Install one of the other driv-
ers”, then click [Next].
8
When the installation is complete, the
Wizard displays “Completing the Found
New Hardware Wizard”.
Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a
while to display the Wizard window.)
9
Restart the computer.
The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.
If you are using Windows Me, skip Step 4–7.
NOTE
Some computers may take about ten seconds to show this screen
after the installation is complete.
NOTE
If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to
install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature”, click [Yes].
NOTE
If the system prompts you to insert the Windows CD-ROM during
detection of the drivers, point to the “USBdrv2k_” folder (e.g.,
D:\USBdrv2k_) and continue the installation.
NOTE
96 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
Installing the driver on Windows XP
1
Start the computer and use the “Adminis-
trator” account to log into Windows.
2
Select [Start] [Control Panel]. If the
control panel appears as “Pick a cate-
gory”, click “Switch to Classic View” in
the upper left of the window. All control
panels and icons will be displayed.
3
Go to [System] [Hardware] [Driver
Signing Options] and check the radio but-
ton to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK].
4
Click the [OK] button to close System
Properties, and then click “X” in the upper
right of the window to close the Control
Panel.
5
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive. A start window will appear
automatically.
6
First, make sure the POWER switch on
the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a
USB cable to connect the MIDI device to
the computer. After making the connec-
tions, turn on the power of the MIDI
device. The system launches the Found
New Hardware Wizard automatically. Oth-
erwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the
“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”
section of the Owner’s Manual. If the sys-
tem displays “Found New Hardware” in
the lower right corner, wait until Wizard
window is displayed. (Some computers
may take a while to display the window.)
If the Wizard window prompts you to specify
whether or not to connect to Windows Update,
select the radio button for “No, not this time”,
then click [Next].
7
Select the radio button for “Install the
software automatically (recommended)”,
then click [Next].
8
When the installation is complete, the
Wizard displays “Completing the Found
New Hardware Wizard”.
Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a
while to display the Wizard window.)
9
Restart the computer.
If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in
the lower right corner, wait until the Wizard win-
dow is displayed. (Some computers may take a
while to display the Wizard window.)
The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.
Installing the Musicsoft
Downloader and Digital
Music Notebook Applications
● ● ●
1
Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your
computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start win-
dow will appear automatically showing
software applications.
2
Click [Musicsoft Downloader] or [Digital
Music Notebook].
3
Click the [install] button for Musicsoft
downloader, or [Digital Music Notebook
Download] button for Digital Music Note-
book, and follow the on-screen instruc-
tions to install the software.
For Digital Music Notebook operating instruc-
tions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music
Notebook application and click “Help”.
For Musicsoft Downloader operating instruc-
tions see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft
Downloader application and click “Help”.
*You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft
Downloader at the following website.
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Win-
dows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP”, click
[Continue Anyway].
NOTE
•You will need to log in with administrator (root) privileges in order
to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows
2000 or XP.
•You will need to log in with administrator (root) privileges in order
to install Digital Music Notebook on a computer running Windows
2000 or XP.
IMPORTANT
When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Inter-
net Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer.
IMPORTANT
Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Note-
book content. Credit card processing may not be possible for
some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make
sure that your credit card can be used.
IMPORTANT
Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBELIUS
SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully agrees to
when using the application. Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at
the end of this manual before using the application.
NOTE
If the start window does not appear automatically, double click your
“My Computer” folder to open it. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and
select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Double click “Start.exe” and
proceed to step 2, below.
NOTE
Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files between
this instrument and a computer. No other file transfer application
can be used.
IMPORTANT
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 97
Troubleshooting
Is the USB cable connected correctly?
Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the
USB cable, then connect it again.
Is the USB function enabled on your com-
puter?
When you connect the instrument to the
computer for the first time, if the “Add New
Hardware Wizard” does not appear, the USB
function on the computer may be disabled.
Perform the following steps.
1 Select [Control Panel] [System]
[Device Manager] (for Windows 98/Me), or
select [Control Panel]* [System]
[Hardware] [Device Manager] (for Win-
dows 2000/XP).
* Classic View only in Windows XP.
2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear
at “Universal serial bus controller” or
“USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x”
mark, the USB controller is disabled.
Is any unknown device registered?
If driver installation fails, the instrument will be
marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will
not be able to install the driver. Delete the
“Unknown device” by following the steps below.
1 Select [Control Panel] [System]
[Device Manager] (for Windows 98/Me), or
select [Control Panel]* [System]
[Hardware] [Device Manager] (for Win-
dows 2000/XP).
* Classic View only in Windows XP.
2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu
“View devices by type”.
3 If you find “Other devices”, double-click it
to extend the tree to look for “Unknown
device”. If one appears, select it and click
the [Remove] button.
4 Remove the USB cable from the instru-
ment, and make the connection again.
5 Install the driver again.
•Windows 98/Me users...... see page 95
•Windows 2000 users........ see page 95
•Windows XP users........... see page 96
Did you install the driver? (page 94)
Is the USB cable connected correctly?
•Are the volume settings of the instrument,
playback device, and application program set
to the appropriate levels?
•Have you selected an appropriate port in the
sequence software?
•Are you using the latest USB MIDI driver?
The latest driver can be downloaded from the
following web site.
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
Does your computer satisfy the system
requirements?
Is any other application or device driver run-
ning?
Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI
application is running.
If you are using Windows 2000, you may not be
able to suspend/resume normally, depending on
the particular environment (USB Host Controller,
etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and
connecting the USB cable will allow you to use
the instrument functions again.
[Windows Me/98]
1 When the instrument is recognized cor-
rectly, double-click “System” in the Con-
trol Panel to open the System window.
2 Double-click the “Device Manager” tab,
select “YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver” and
delete it.
3 Use the MS-DOS prompt or Explorer to
delete the following three files.
The driver cannot be installed. When controlling the instrument from
your computer via USB, the instrument
does not operate correctly or no sound
is heard.
Playback response is delayed.
Cannot suspend or resume the
computer correctly.
How can I delete or re-install the
driver?
98 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide
4 Disconnect the USB cable.
5 Restart the computer.
6 Re-install the driver.
ATTENTION
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREE-
MENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE
ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT
IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND
YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”).
BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO
BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE
WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS
SOFTWARE.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT
Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s)
and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFT-
WARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data.
The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is pro-
tected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While
you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFT-
WARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copy-
rights.
You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer.
You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for
backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup
copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copy-
right notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy
of the SOFTWARE.
You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFT-
WARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads
and agrees to the terms of this Agreement.
2. RESTRICTIONS
You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or
otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method
whatsoever.
You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFT-
WARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE.
You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to
another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers.
You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that vio-
lates public policy.
You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without
permission by Yamaha Corporation
Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained
by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which
you must observe.
Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any com-
mercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner.
Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, trans-
ferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public
without permission of the copyright owner.
The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be
removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission
of the copyright owner.
3. TERMINATION
This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFT-
WARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provi-
sions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate
automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such ter-
mination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any
accompanying written documents and all copies thereof.
4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA
As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible
media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in mate-
rials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days
from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire
liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media
if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days
with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media dam-
aged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE
You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your
sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS”
and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER
PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DIS-
CLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING,
YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN
THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED.
6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PER-
MIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO
EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PER-
SON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARIS-
ING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFT-
WARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall
Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action
(whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFT-
WARE.
7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be
attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data
accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must
abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is
responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof.
•Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFT-
WARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
•Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
•Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including,
without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages,
expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, mis-
use or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
8. GENERAL
This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese
law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or proce-
dure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason
a court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be
unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and
effect.
9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT
This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with
respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials
and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements,
written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amend-
ment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and
signed by a fully authorized representative of Yamaha.
•To delete these files using Explorer, select “Folder Options” from
the Tool (View) menu, and select “Show all files” (and folders).
• \WINDOWS\INF\OTHER\1037.INF
• \WINDOWS\SYSTEM\Xgusb.drv
• \WINDOWS\SYSTEM\Ymidusb.sys
NOTE
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 99
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping
sound is temporarily produced.
This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power.
When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.
Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interfer-
ence. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the
instrument.
There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or
when a song or style is being played back.
Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear
panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output.
Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 87.)
Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard
does not produce any sound.
When using the Dictionary function (page 77), the keys in the right hand area
are used only for entering the chord root and type.
The volume is too soft.
The sound quality is poor.
The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play.
The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-
rectly.
The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel
settings are reset.
The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new
ones, or use the optional AC adaptor.
The style or song does not play back when the
[START/STOP] button is pressed.
Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to
“External Clock” on page 87.
The style does not sound properly.
Make sure that the Style Volume (page 83) is set to an appropriate level.
Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the
split point at an appropriate key (page 72).
Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the
[ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.
No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/
STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number
138 or a style between 150 and 162 (Pianist).
This is not a malfunction. Style number 138 and style numbers 150–162 (Pia-
nist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin
playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if
style playback is turned on.
Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound
seems to be cut off.
The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or
Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time,
some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or
song.
Some notes don’t sound when playing multiple notes
simultaneously on the keyboard, or some notes don’t
sound when playing arpeggios.
You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony
(the maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously) of the
instrument. The instrument will play normally as long as no more than 32 notes
are being played at once, both on the keyboard and by any automatic playback
functions.
The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the
opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch
cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.
The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is
properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.
The sound of the voice changes from note to note.
This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings
(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual
sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.
The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played.
Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on.
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off.
The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the
[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.
Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are
going to use any style-related function.
There is no harmony sound.
The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types
01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompani-
ment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range.
Types 06–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 06 = 12
you need to play two notes at the same time.
Appendix
100 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Scores
This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece.
Hallelujah Chorus
Song No. 9 qq
qq
=123
(Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger)
Scores
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 101
Scores
102 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-
ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the
part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.
Ave Maria
Song No. 10 qq
qq
=61
(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)
Repeatedly Play the Same Key.
P.A.T.
Your Turn.
Type =CHORD
Scores
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 103
Scores
104 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-
ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the
part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.
Nocturne op.9-2
Song No. 11 qq
qq
=108
(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)
P.A.T.
You Can Even Play the Same Keys!
Type =CHORD
Scores
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 105
106 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Let’s play the Tabla
Instruction Flow:
1
Press the [VOICE] button.
2
Use the dial or the number buttons to
select 129 (Teen Tal C).
3
Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] but-
ton for longer than a second and “Split-
Pnt” will appear in the display.
4
Use the dial or the number buttons to
change the split point to 83.
5
Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button and
split voice icon will appear in the dis-
play.
6
Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] but-
ton for longer than a second and
“S.Voice” will appear in the display.
7
Use the dial or the number buttons to
select the Split Voice number 145 (Har-
monium 2).
8
Press the CATEGORY [ ] button twice
and “S.Octave” will appear in the dis-
play.
9
Press the number [0] button to set the
octave 0.
10
Play the keyboard.
Set the Voice
number to 129
(Teen Tal C).
Set the split
point to 83.
Set the Split Voice
number to 145
(Harmonium 2).
Set the octave
range for the Split
Voice to 0.
Now play
the Tabla.
f
Changing the Tabla type
You can change the Tabla type by selecting the Arpeggio type (51–62). Press and hold the
[ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button for longer than a second and select the arpeggio type (51–62).
Split
point
Harmonium 2 Teen Tal C
Hold the Keyboards.Play the Keyboards.
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 107
Voice List
Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means
that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regard-
less of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a
number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment
is used the total number of available notes for playing on the
keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the
Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is
exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most
recent notes have priority (last note priority).
Panel Voice List
The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for
each voice. Use these program change numbers when
playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device.
Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Pro-
gram Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program
Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value
of 1. Remember to take this into consideration.
Some voices may sound continuously or have a long
decay after the notes have been released while the sus-
tain pedal (footswitch) is held.
NOTE
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PIANO
001 000 112 001 Grand Piano
002 000 112 002 Bright Piano
003 000 112 007 Harpsichord
004 000 112 004 Honky-tonk Piano
005 000 112 003 MIDI Grand Piano
006 000 113 003 CP 80
E.PIANO
007 000 114 005 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano
008 000 113 006 Hyper Tines
009 000 112 005 Funky Electric Piano
010 000 112 006 DX Modern Electric Piano
011 000 114 006 Venus Electric Piano
012 000 112 008 Clavi
ORGAN
013 000 118 019 Cool! Organ
014 000 117 019 Cool! Rotor Organ
015 000 112 017 Jazz Organ 1
016 000 113 017 Jazz Organ 2
017 000 112 019 Rock Organ
018 000 114 019 Purple Organ
019 000 112 018 Click Organ
020 000 116 017 Bright Organ
021 000 127 019 Theater Organ
022 000 121 020 16'+2' Organ
023 000 120 020 16'+4' Organ
024 000 113 020 Chapel Organ
025 000 112 020 Church Organ
026 000 112 021 Reed Organ
ACCORDION
027 000 112 022 Musette Accordion
028 000 113 022 Traditional Accordion
029 000 113 024 Bandoneon
030 000 113 023 Modern Harp
031 000 112 023 Harmonica
GUITAR
032 000 112 025 Classical Guitar
033 000 112 026 Folk Guitar
034 000 112 027 Jazz Guitar
035 000 117 028 60’s Clean Guitar
036 000 113 026 12Strings Guitar
037 000 112 028 Clean Guitar
038 000 113 027 Octave Guitar
039 000 112 029 Muted Guitar
040 000 112 030 Overdriven Guitar
041 000 112 031 Distortion Guitar
BASS
042 000 112 034 Finger Bass
043 000 112 033 Acoustic Bass
044 000 112 035 Pick Bass
045 000 112 036 Fretless Bass
046 000 112 037 Slap Bass
047 000 112 039 Synth Bass
048 000 113 039 Hi-Q Bass
049 000 113 040 Dance Bass
STRINGS
050 000 112 049 String Ensemble
051 000 112 050 Chamber Strings
052 000 113 050 Slow Strings
053 000 112 045 Tremolo Strings
054 000 112 051 Synth Strings
055 000 112 046 Pizzicato Strings
056 000 112 041 Violin
057 000 112 043 Cello
058 000 112 044 Contrabass
059 000 112 047 Harp
060 000 112 106 Banjo
061 000 112 056 Orchestra Hit
CHOIR
062 000 112 053 Choir
063 000 113 053 Vocal Ensemble
064 000 112 055 Air Choir
065 000 112 054 Vox Humana
SAXOPHONE
066 000 117 067 Sweet! Tenor Sax
067 000 113 065 Sweet! Soprano Sax
068 000 112 067 Tenor Sax
069 000 112 066 Alto Sax
070 000 112 065 Soprano Sax
071 000 112 068 Baritone Sax
072 000 114 067 Breathy Tenor Sax
073 000 112 072 Clarinet
074 000 112 069 Oboe
075 000 112 070 English Horn
076 000 112 071 Bassoon
TRUMPET
077 000 115 057 Sweet! Trumpet
078 000 112 057 Trumpet
079 000 112 058 Trombone
080 000 113 058 Trombone Section
081 000 112 060 Muted Trumpet
082 000 112 061 French Horn
083 000 112 059 Tuba
BRASS
084 000 112 062 Brass Section
085 000 113 062 Big Band Brass
086 000 113 063 80’s Brass
087 000 119 062 Mellow Horns
088 000 114 063 Techno Brass
089 000 112 063 Synth Brass
FLUTE
090 000 114 074 Sweet! Flute
091 000 113 076 Sweet! Pan Flute
092 000 112 074 Flute
093 000 112 073 Piccolo
094 000 112 076 Pan Flute
095 000 112 075 Recorder
096 000 112 080 Ocarina
SYNTH LEAD
097 000 112 081 Square Lead
098 000 112 082 Sawtooth Lead
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
108 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List
099 000 115 082 Analogon
100 000 119 082 Fargo
101 000 112 099 Star Dust
102 000 112 086 Voice Lead
103 000 112 101 Brightness
SYNTH PAD
104 000 112 092 Xenon Pad
105 000 112 095 Equinox
106 000 112 089 Fantasia
107 000 113 090 Dark Moon
108 000 113 101 Bell Pad
PERCUSSION
109 000 112 012 Vibraphone
110 000 112 013 Marimba
111 000 112 014 Xylophone
112 000 112 115 Steel Drums
113 000 112 009 Celesta
114 000 112 011 Music Box
115 000 112 015 Tubular Bells
116 000 112 048 Timpani
DRUM KITS
117 127 000 001 Standard Kit 1
118 127 000 002 Standard Kit 2
119 127 000 009 Room Kit
120 127 000 017 Rock Kit
121 127 000 025 Electronic Kit
122 127 000 026 Analog Kit
123 127 000 113 Dance Kit
124 127 000 033 Jazz Kit
125 127 000 041 Brush Kit
126 127 000 049 Symphony Kit
127 126 000 001 SFX Kit 1
128 126 000 002 SFX Kit 2
ARPEGGIO
129 126 000 116 Teen Tal C
130 126 000 116 Teen Tal F
131 126 000 116 Teen Tal A
132 126 000 116 Dadra D
133 126 000 116 Dadra E
134 126 000 116 Dadra G
135 000 112 081 Synth Sequence
136 000 096 082 Chord Sequence
137 000 000 081 Square Pulse
138 000 113 063 Trance
139 000 114 063 Synth Echo
140 000 112 001 Piano Arpeggio
141 000 117 028 Guitar Chord
142 000 112 025 Guitar Arpeggio
143 127 000 002 Massive Percussion
INDIAN
144 000 113 021 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed)
145 000 114 021 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed)
146 000 115 021 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed)
147 000 117 074 Bansuri
148 000 112 105 Sitar 1
149 000 113 105 Sitar 2
150 000 115 105 Sarod
151 000 114 105 Tanpura
152 126 000 116 Tabla Kit
153 126 000 115 Indian Kit
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PIANO
154 000 000 001 Grand Piano
155 000 001 001 Grand Piano KSP
156 000 040 001 Piano Strings
157 000 041 001 Dream
158 000 000 002 Bright Piano
159 000 001 002 Bright Piano KSP
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
160 000 000 003 Electric Grand Piano
161 000 001 003 Electric Grand Piano KSP
162 000 032 003 Detuned CP80
163 000 000 004 Honky-tonk Piano
164 000 001 004 Honky-tonk Piano KSP
165 000 000 005 Electric Piano 1
166 000 001 005 Electric Piano 1 KSP
167 000 032 005 Chorus Electric Piano 1
168 000 000 006 Electric Piano 2
169 000 001 006 Electric Piano 2 KSP
*170 000 032 006 Chorus Electric Piano 2
171 000 041 006 DX + Analog Electric Piano
172 000 000 007 Harpsichord
173 000 001 007 Harpsichord KSP
174 000 035 007 Harpsichord 2
175 000 000 008 Clavi
176 000 001 008 Clavi KSP
CHROMATIC
177 000 000 009 Celesta
178 000 000 010 Glockenspiel
179 000 000 011 Music Box
180 000 064 011 Orgel
181 000 000 012 Vibraphone
182 000 001 012 Vibraphone KSP
183 000 000 013 Marimba
184 000 001 013 Marimba KSP
185 000 064 013 Sine Marimba
186 000 097 013 Balimba
187 000 098 013 Log Drums
188 000 000 014 Xylophone
189 000 000 015 Tubular Bells
190 000 096 015 Church Bells
191 000 097 015 Carillon
192 000 000 016 Dulcimer
193 000 035 016 Dulcimer 2
194 000 096 016 Cimbalom
195 000 097 016 Santur
ORGAN
196 000 000 017 Drawbar Organ
197 000 032 017 Detuned Drawbar Organ
198 000 033 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 1
199 000 034 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 2
200 000 035 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 1
201 000 037 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 3
202 000 040 017 16+2'2/3
203 000 064 017 Organ Bass
204 000 065 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 2
205 000 066 017 Cheezy Organ
206 000 067 017 Drawbar Organ 2
207 000 000 018 Percussive Organ
208 000 024 018 70’s Percussive Organ
209 000 032 018 Detuned Percussive Organ
210 000 033 018 Light Organ
211 000 037 018 Percussive Organ 2
212 000 000 019 Rock Organ
213 000 064 019 Rotary Organ
214 000 065 019 Slow Rotary
215 000 066 019 Fast Rotary
216 000 000 020 Church Organ
217 000 032 020 Church Organ 3
218 000 035 020 Church Organ 2
219 000 040 020 Notre Dame
220 000 064 020 Organ Flute
221 000 065 020 Tremolo Organ Flute
222 000 000 021 Reed Organ
223 000 040 021 Puff Organ
224 000 000 022 Accordion
225 000 000 023 Harmonica
226 000 032 023 Harmonica 2
227 000 000 024 Tango Accordion
228 000 064 024 Tango Accordion 2
GUITAR
229 000 000 025 Nylon Guitar
230 000 043 025 Velocity Guitar Harmonics
231 000 096 025 Ukulele
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 109
232 000 000 026 Steel Guitar
233 000 035 026 12-string Guitar
234 000 040 026 Nylon & Steel Guitar
235 000 041 026 Steel Guitar with Body Sound
236 000 096 026 Mandolin
237 000 000 027 Jazz Guitar
238 000 032 027 Jazz Amp
239 000 000 028 Clean Guitar
240 000 032 028 Chorus Guitar
241 000 000 029 Muted Guitar
242 000 040 029 Funk Guitar
243 000 041 029 Muted Steel Guitar
244 000 045 029 Jazz Man
245 000 000 030 Overdriven Guitar
246 000 043 030 Guitar Pinch
247 000 000 031 Distortion Guitar
248 000 040 031 Feedback Guitar
249 000 041 031 Feedback Guitar 2
250 000 000 032 Guitar Harmonics
251 000 065 032 Guitar Feedback
252 000 066 032 Guitar Harmonics 2
BASS
253 000 000 033 Acoustic Bass
254 000 040 033 Jazz Rhythm
255 000 045 033 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass
256 000 000 034 Finger Bass
257 000 018 034 Finger Dark
258 000 040 034 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar
259 000 043 034 Finger Slap Bass
260 000 045 034 Finger Bass 2
261 000 065 034 Modulated Bass
262 000 000 035 Pick Bass
263 000 028 035 Muted Pick Bass
264 000 000 036 Fretless Bass
265 000 032 036 Fretless Bass 2
266 000 033 036 Fretless Bass 3
267 000 034 036 Fretless Bass 4
268 000 000 037 Slap Bass 1
269 000 032 037 Punch Thumb Bass
270 000 000 038 Slap Bass 2
271 000 043 038 Velocity Switch Slap
272 000 000 039 Synth Bass 1
273 000 040 039 Techno Synth Bass
274 000 000 040 Synth Bass 2
275 000 006 040 Mellow Synth Bass
276 000 012 040 Sequenced Bass
277 000 018 040 Click Synth Bass
278 000 019 040 Synth Bass 2 Dark
*279 000 040 040 Modular Synth Bass
280 000 041 040 DX Bass
STRINGS
281 000 000 041 Violin
282 000 008 041 Slow Violin
283 000 000 042 Viola
284 000 000 043 Cello
285 000 000 044 Contrabass
286 000 000 045 Tremolo Strings
287 000 008 045 Slow Tremolo Strings
288 000 040 045 Suspense Strings
289 000 000 046 Pizzicato Strings
290 000 000 047 Orchestral Harp
291 000 040 047 Yang Chin
292 000 000 048 Timpani
ENSEMBLE
293 000 000 049 Strings 1
294 000 003 049 Stereo Strings
295 000 008 049 Slow Strings
296 000 035 049 60’s Strings
297 000 040 049 Orchestra
298 000 041 049 Orchestra 2
299 000 042 049 Tremolo Orchestra
300 000 045 049 Velocity Strings
301 000 000 050 Strings 2
302 000 003 050 Stereo Slow Strings
303 000 008 050 Legato Strings
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
304 000 040 050 Warm Strings
305 000 041 050 Kingdom
306 000 000 051 Synth Strings 1
307 000 000 052 Synth Strings 2
308 000 000 053 Choir Aahs
309 000 003 053 Stereo Choir
310 000 032 053 Mellow Choir
311 000 040 053 Choir Strings
312 000 000 054 Voice Oohs
313 000 000 055 Synth Voice
314 000 040 055 Synth Voice 2
315 000 041 055 Choral
316 000 064 055 Analog Voice
317 000 000 056 Orchestra Hit
318 000 035 056 Orchestra Hit 2
319 000 064 056 Impact
BRASS
320 000 000 057 Trumpet
321 000 032 057 Warm Trumpet
322 000 000 058 Trombone
323 000 018 058 Trombone 2
324 000 000 059 Tuba
325 000 000 060 Muted Trumpet
326 000 000 061 French Horn
327 000 006 061 French Horn Solo
328 000 032 061 French Horn 2
329 000 037 061 Horn Orchestra
330 000 000 062 Brass Section
331 000 035 062 Trumpet & Trombone Section
332 000 000 063 Synth Brass 1
333 000 020 063 Resonant Synth Brass
334 000 000 064 Synth Brass 2
335 000 018 064 Soft Brass
336 000 041 064 Choir Brass
REED
337 000 000 065 Soprano Sax
338 000 000 066 Alto Sax
339 000 040 066 Sax Section
340 000 000 067 Tenor Sax
341 000 040 067 Breathy Tenor Sax
342 000 000 068 Baritone Sax
343 000 000 069 Oboe
344 000 000 070 English Horn
345 000 000 071 Bassoon
346 000 000 072 Clarinet
PIPE
347 000 000 073 Piccolo
348 000 000 074 Flute
349 000 000 075 Recorder
350 000 000 076 Pan Flute
351 000 000 077 Blown Bottle
352 000 000 078 Shakuhachi
353 000 000 079 Whistle
354 000 000 080 Ocarina
SYNTH LEAD
355 000 000 081 Square Lead
356 000 006 081 Square Lead 2
357 000 008 081 LM Square
358 000 018 081 Hollow
359 000 019 081 Shroud
360 000 064 081 Mellow
361 000 065 081 Solo Sine
362 000 066 081 Sine Lead
363 000 000 082 Sawtooth Lead
364 000 006 082 Sawtooth Lead 2
365 000 008 082 Thick Sawtooth
366 000 018 082 Dynamic Sawtooth
367 000 019 082 Digital Sawtooth
368 000 020 082 Big Lead
369 000 096 082 Sequenced Analog
370 000 000 083 Calliope Lead
371 000 065 083 Pure Lead
372 000 000 084 Chiff Lead
373 000 000 085 Charang Lead
374 000 064 085 Distorted Lead
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
110 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice.
375 000 000 086 Voice Lead
376 000 000 087 Fifths Lead
377 000 035 087 Big Five
378 000 000 088 Bass & Lead
379 000 016 088 Big & Low
380 000 064 088 Fat & Perky
381 000 065 088 Soft Whirl
SYNTH PAD
382 000 000 089 New Age Pad
383 000 064 089 Fantasy
384 000 000 090 Warm Pad
385 000 000 091 Poly Synth Pad
386 000 000 092 Choir Pad
387 000 066 092 Itopia
388 000 000 093 Bowed Pad
389 000 000 094 Metallic Pad
390 000 000 095 Halo Pad
391 000 000 096 Sweep Pad
SYNTH EFFECTS
392 000 000 097 Rain
393 000 065 097 African Wind
394 000 066 097 Carib
395 000 000 098 Sound Track
396 000 027 098 Prologue
397 000 000 099 Crystal
398 000 012 099 Synth Drum Comp
399 000 014 099 Popcorn
400 000 018 099 Tiny Bells
401 000 035 099 Round Glockenspiel
402 000 040 099 Glockenspiel Chimes
403 000 041 099 Clear Bells
404 000 042 099 Chorus Bells
405 000 065 099 Soft Crystal
406 000 070 099 Air Bells
407 000 071 099 Bell Harp
408 000 072 099 Gamelimba
409 000 000 100 Atmosphere
410 000 018 100 Warm Atmosphere
411 000 019 100 Hollow Release
412 000 040 100 Nylon Electric Piano
413 000 064 100 Nylon Harp
414 000 065 100 Harp Vox
415 000 066 100 Atmosphere Pad
416 000 000 101 Brightness
417 000 000 102 Goblins
418 000 064 102 Goblins Synth
419 000 065 102 Creeper
420 000 067 102 Ritual
421 000 068 102 To Heaven
422 000 070 102 Night
423 000 071 102 Glisten
424 000 096 102 Bell Choir
425 000 000 103 Echoes
426 000 000 104 Sci-Fi
WORLD
427 000 000 105 Sitar
428 000 032 105 Detuned Sitar
429 000 035 105 Sitar 2
430 000 097 105 Tamboura
431 000 000 106 Banjo
432 000 028 106 Muted Banjo
433 000 096 106 Rabab
434 000 097 106 Gopichant
435 000 098 106 Oud
436 000 000 107 Shamisen
437 000 000 108 Koto
438 000 096 108 Taisho-kin
439 000 097 108 Kanoon
440 000 000 109 Kalimba
441 000 000 110 Bagpipe
442 000 000 111 Fiddle
443 000 000 112 Shanai
PERCUSSIVE
444 000 000 113 Tinkle Bell
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
445 000 096 113 Bonang
446 000 097 113 Altair
447 000 098 113 Gamelan Gongs
448 000 099 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs
449 000 100 113 Rama Cymbal
450 000 000 114 Agogo
451 000 000 115 Steel Drums
452 000 097 115 Glass Percussion
453 000 098 115 Thai Bells
454 000 000 116 Woodblock
455 000 096 116 Castanets
456 000 000 117 Taiko Drum
457 000 096 117 Gran Cassa
458 000 000 118 Melodic Tom
459 000 064 118 Melodic Tom 2
460 000 065 118 Real Tom
461 000 066 118 Rock Tom
462 000 000 119 Synth Drum
463 000 064 119 Analog Tom
464 000 065 119 Electronic Percussion
465 000 000 120 Reverse Cymbal
SOUND EFFECTS
466 000 000 121 Fret Noise
467 000 000 122 Breath Noise
468 000 000 123 Seashore
469 000 000 124 Bird Tweet
470 000 000 125 Telephone Ring
471 000 000 126 Helicopter
472 000 000 127 Applause
473 000 000 128 Gunshot
474 064 000 001 Cutting Noise
475 064 000 002 Cutting Noise 2
476 064 000 004 String Slap
477 064 000 017 Flute Key Click
478 064 000 033 Shower
479 064 000 034 Thunder
480 064 000 035 Wind
481 064 000 036 Stream
482 064 000 037 Bubble
483 064 000 038 Feed
484 064 000 049 Dog
485 064 000 050 Horse
486 064 000 051 Bird Tweet 2
487 064 000 056 Maou
488 064 000 065 Phone Call
489 064 000 066 Door Squeak
490 064 000 067 Door Slam
491 064 000 068 Scratch Cut
492 064 000 069 Scratch Split
493 064 000 070 Wind Chime
494 064 000 071 Telephone Ring 2
495 064 000 081 Car Engine Ignition
496 064 000 082 Car Tires Squeal
497 064 000 083 Car Passing
498 064 000 084 Car Crash
499 064 000 085 Siren
500 064 000 086 Train
501 064 000 087 Jet Plane
502 064 000 088 Starship
503 064 000 089 Burst
504 064 000 090 Roller Coaster
505 064 000 091 Submarine
506 064 000 097 Laugh
507 064 000 098 Scream
508 064 000 099 Punch
509 064 000 100 Heartbeat
510 064 000 101 Footsteps
511 064 000 113 Machine Gun
512 064 000 114 Laser Gun
513 064 000 115 Explosion
514 064 000 116 Firework
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 111
Drum Kit List
•“ indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.
Each percussion voice uses one note.
The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “117: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/
Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).
•Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.
•Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.)
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
Voice No. 117 118 119 120 121 122
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
Group
Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Snare Roll 2
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy
Snare Snappy Electro
Snare Noisy 4
44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot H Short
47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Tight Short Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Analog Short
48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Short Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Analog
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Rim Snare Noisy 3 Snare Analog 2
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 Tom Analog 1
54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed Analog
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Analog 2
56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Analog 3
58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Analog
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 Tom Analog 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 Tom Analog 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Tom Analog 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Maracas 2
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L
85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 2 Scratch L 3
92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree
97 C# 685C# 5
98 D 6 86 D 5
99 D# 687D# 5
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5
Drum Kit List
112 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Voice No. 117 123 124 125 126 127 128
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/001 126/000/002
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
Group
Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2
44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Techno Q Kick Soft 2
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate
47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Techno L Gran Cassa
48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Small Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Door Slam
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Scratch H 3
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Analog 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Wind Chime
54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed Analog3
Telephone Ring 2
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Analog 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2
56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Analog 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3
58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open Analog 2
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Analog 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Analog 5 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog Hand Cymbal
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Analog 6 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1
Hand Cymbal Short
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Car Passing
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Car Crash
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog Siren
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Train
70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap Jet Plane
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
Hand Cymbal 2 Short
Starship
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Burst
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L Roller Coaster
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H Submarine
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Shower Laugh
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Thunder Scream
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Maracas 2 Wind Punch
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H Stream Heartbeat
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L Bubble Footsteps
85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Feed
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 3
92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun
97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun
98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion
99 D# 687D# 5 Firework
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
Drum Kit List
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 113
Voice No. 152 153
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128)
126/000/116 126/000/115 126/000/117 126/000/040
Keyboard MIDI
Tabla Kit (Panel)
Alternate
Group
Indian Kit (Panel)
Alternate
Group
Tabla Kit Indian Kit
Alternate
Group
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1
Baya ke / ge
(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)
26 D 0 14 D -1
27 D# 015D# -1 Hand Clap
28 E 0 16 E -1 A Tabla na 6 Dafli Open
29 F 0 17 F -1 A Tabla tin 6 Dafli Slap 1
30 F# 018F# -1 A Tabla Center tin 6 Dafli Rim 1
31 G 0 19 G -1 A Tabla ti 01 6 Duff Open
32 G# 020G# -1 A Tabla ti 02 6 Duff Slap
33 A 0 21 A -1 A Tabla ri 6 Duff Rim
34 A# 022A# -1 A Tabla kat 6 Hatheli Long 2 Hateli Long
35 B 0 23 B -1 A Tabla tu 6 Hatheli Short 2 Hateli Short
36 C 1 24 C 0 Open Baya 7 Baya ge 3 Baya ge 1
37 C# 125C# 0 Mid Baya 7 Baya ke 3 Baya ke 1
38 D 1 26 D 0 Press Baya 7 Baya ghe 3 Baya ghe 1
39 D# 127D# 0 Bend Baya Slow 7 Baya ka 3 Baya ka 1
40 E 1 28 E 0 Bend Baya Fast 7 Tabla na 4 Tabla na 2
41 F 1 29 F 0 Click 7 Tabla tin 4 Tabla tin 2
42 F# 130F# 0 Open Click 7 Tablabaya dha 3 Tablabaya dha 1
43 G 1 31 G 0 G Low Tabla Tharang Dhol 1 Open Tabla tun 2
44 G# 132G# 0G# Low Tabla Tharang Dhol 1 Slap 5 Tablabaya dhin 1
45 A 1 33 A 0 A Low Tabla Tarang Dhol 1 Mute 5 Tabla di 2
46 A# 134A# 0A# Low Tabla Tarang Dhol 1 Open Slap 5 Tablabaya dhe 1
47 B 1 35 B 0 B Low Tabla Tarang Dhol 1 Roll Tabla ti 2
48 C 2 36 C 1 C Low Tabla Tarang Dandia Short 6 Tabla ne 2
49 C# 237C# 1C# Low Tabla Tarang Dandia Long 6 Tabla taran 2
50 D 2 38 D 1 D Low Tabla Tarang Chutki Tabla tak 2
51 D# 239D# 1D# Low Tabla Tarang Chipri Chipri
52 E 2 40 E 1 E Low Tabla Tarang Khanjira Open Kanjira Open 3
53 F 2 41 F 1 F Low Tabla Tarang Khanjira Slap Kanjira Slap 3
54 F# 242F# 1F# Low Tabla Tarang Khanjira Mute Kanjira Mute 3
55 G 2 43 G 1 G Low Tabla Tarang Khanjira Bendup Kanjira Bend up 3
56 G# 244G# 1G# Low Tabla Tarang Khanjira Benddown Kanjira Bend down 3
57 A 2 45 A 1 A Low Tabla Tarang Dholak 1 Open Dholak Open 4
58 A# 246A# 1A# Low Tabla Tarang Dholak 1 Mute 7 Dholak Mute 4
59 B 2 47 B 1 B Low Tabla Tarang Dholak 1 Slap 7 Dholak Slap 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 C Tabla na 1 Dhol 2 Open
Baya ka / ghe
(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)
Dhol Open 5
61 C# 349C# 2C Tabla tin 1 Dhol 2 Slap 8 Dhol Mute 5
62 D 3 50 D 2 C Tabla Center tin 1 Dhol 2 Rim 8 Dhol Slap 5
63 D# 351D# 2C Tabla ti 01 1 Mridangam na 9 Dhol Slide 5
64 E 3 52 E 2 C Tabla ti 02 1 Mridangam din 9 Mridangam Normal 6
65 F 3 53 F 2 C Tabla ri 1 Mridangam ki 9 Mridangam Open 6
66 F# 354F# 2C Tabla kat 1 Mridangam ta 9 Mridangam Mute 6
67 G 3 55 G 2 C Tabla tu 1 Mridangam Chapu 9 Mridangam Slap 6
68 G# 356G# 2D Tabla na 2 Mridangam Lo Closed 10 Mridangam Rim 6
69 A 3 57 A 2 D Tabla tin 2 Mridangam Lo Open 10 Chimta Open 7
70 A# 358A# 2D Tabla Center tin 2 Chimta Normal 11 Chimta Normal 7
71 B 3 59 B 2 D Tabla ti 01 2 Chimta Ring 11 Chimta Ring 7
72 C 4 60 C 3 D Tabla ti 02 2 Dholki Hi Open 12
Tabla ne / na
(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)
Dholki Open 8
73 C# 461C# 3D Tabla ri 2 Dholki Hi Mute 12 Dholki Mute 8
74 D 4 62 D 3 D Tabla kat 2 Dholki Lo Open 13 Dholki Slap 8
75 D# 463D# 3D Tabla tu 2 Dholki Hi Slap 12 Dholki Slide 8
76 E 4 64 E 3 E Tabla na 3 Dholki Lo Slide 13 Dholki Rim 8
77 F 4 65 F 3 E Tabla tin 3 Khol Open 14 Khol Open 9
78 F# 466F# 3E Tabla Center tin 3 Khol Slide Khol Slide 9
79 G 4 67 G 3 E Tabla ti 01 3 Khol Mute 14 Khol Mute 9
80 G# 468G# 3E Tabla ti 02 3 Manjira Open 15 Manjira Open 10
81 A 4 69 A 3 E Tabla ri 3 Manjira Close 15 Manjira Close 10
82 A# 470A# 3E Tabla kat 3 Jhanji Open 16 Jhanji Open 11
83 B 4 71 B 3 E Tabla tu 3 Jhanji Close 16 Jhanji Close 11
84 C 5 72 C 4 F Tabla na 4 Mondira Open 17
Tabla ne / tin
(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)
Mondira Open 12
85 C# 573C# 4F Tabla tin 4 Mondira Close 17 Mondira Close 12
86 D 5 74 D 4 F Tabla Center tin 4 Bhangra Scat 1 Mridang Open 13
87 D# 575D# 4F Tabla ti 01 4 Bhangra Scat 2 Mridang Mute 13
88 E 5 76 E 4 F Tabla ti 02 4 Bhangra Scat 3 Mridang Rim 13
89 F 5 77 F 4 F Tabla ri 4 Bhangra Scat 4 Mridang Slide 13
90 F# 578F# 4F Tabla kat 4 Khomokh Normal Khomokh Normal
91 G 5 79 G 4 F Tabla tu 4 Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mute
92 G# 580G# 4G Tabla na 5 Khomokh Mltatk Khomokh Mltatk
93 A 5 81 A 4 G Tabla tin 5 Thavil Open Madal-A2
94 A# 582A# 4G Tabla Center tin 5 Thavil Slap Madal-A#2
95 B 5 83 B 4 G Tabla ti 01 5 Thavil Mute Madal-B2
96 C 6 84 C 5 G Tabla ti 02 5 Khartaal
Tabla ne / di
(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)
Madal-C3
97 C# 685C# 5G Tabla ri 5 Dholak 2 Open 18 Madal-C#3
98 D 6 86 D 5 G Tabla kat 5 Dholak 2 Slide 18 Madal-D3
99 D# 687D# 5G Tabla tu 5 Dholak 2 Rim 1 Madal-D#3
100 E 6 88 E 5 Dholak 2 Rim 2 Madal-E3
101 F 6 89 F 5 Dholak 2 Ring Madal-F3
102 F# 690F# 5 Dholak 2 Slap Madal-F#3
103 G 6 91 G 5 Dholak 2 Body Madal-G3
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
114 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Style List
Style No. Style Name
8BEAT
001 8BeatModern
002 Cool8Beat
003 60’sGuitarPop
004 8BeatAdria
005 60’s8Beat
006 BubblegumPop
007 BritPopSwing
008 8Beat
009 OffBeat
010 60’sRock
011 HardRock
012 RockShuffle
013 8BeatRock
16BEAT
014 16Beat
015 PopShuffle1
016 PopShuffle2
017 GuitarPop
018 16BeatUptempo
019 KoolShuffle
020 JazzRock
021 HipHopLight
BALLAD
022 PianoBallad
023 LoveSong
024 6/8ModernEP
025 6/8SlowRock
026 6/8OrchBallad
027 OrganBallad
028 PopBallad
029 16BeatBallad1
030 16BeatBallad2
DANCE
031 EuroTrance
032 Ibiza
033 DreamDance
034 NewHipHop
035 PopR&B
036 TrancePop
037 ChartPop
038 HouseMusik
039 SwingHouse
040 TechnoPolis
041 Clubdance
042 ClubLatin
043 Garage1
044 Garage2
045 TechnoParty
046 UKPop
047 HipHopGroove
048 HipShuffle
049 HipHopPop
DISCO
050 70’sDisco1
051 70’sDisco2
052 LatinDisco
053 DiscoPhilly
054 SaturdayNight
055 DiscoChocolate
056 DiscoHands
SWING&JAZZ
057 BigBandFast
058 BigBandMedium
059 BigBandBallad
060 BigBandShuffle
061 JazzClub
062 Swing1
063 Swing2
064 OrchestraSwing
065 Five/Four
066 JazzBallad
067 Dixieland
068 Ragtime
069 AfroCuban
070 Charleston
R&B
071 Soul
072 DetroitPop1
073 60’sRock&Roll
074 6/8Soul
075 ModernR&B
076 CrocoTwist
077 Rock&Roll
078 DetroitPop2
079 BoogieWoogie
080 ComboBoogie
081 6/8Blues
COUNTRY
082 Country8Beat
083 CountryPop
084 CountrySwing
085 CountryBallad
086 Country2/4
087 CowboyBoogie
088 CountryShuffle
089 Bluegrass
INDIAN
090 Bolly Mix 1
091 Bolly Mix 2
092 Indian Pop
093 Bhangra
094 Boliyan
095 Goan Pop
096 Garba
097 Rajstahan
098 Qawwali
099 Bhajan
100 Tamil
101 Kerala
LATIN
102 BrazilianSamba
103 BossaNova
104 PopBossa
105 Tijuana
106 DiscoLatin
107 Mambo
108 Salsa
109 Beguine
110 GuitarRumba
111 RumbaFlamenco
112 RumbaIsland
113 Reggae
Style No. Style Name
BALLROOM
114 VienneseWaltz
115 EnglishWaltz
116 Slowfox
117 Foxtrot
118 Quickstep
119 Tango
120 Pasodoble
121 Samba
122 ChaChaCha
123 Rumba
124 Jive
TRAD/WORLD
125 USMarch
126 6/8March
127 GermanMarch
128 PolkaPop
129 OberPolka
130 Tarantella
131 Showtune
132 ChristmasSwing
133 ChristmasWaltz
134 ScottishReel
135 Hawaiian
WALTZ
136 ItalianWaltz
137 MariachiWaltz
138 GuitarSerenade
139 SwingWaltz
140 JazzWaltz1
141 JazzWaltz2
142 CountryWaltz
143 OberWaltzer
144 Musette
CHILDREN
145 Learning2/4
146 Learning4/4
147 Learning6/8
148 Fun 3/4
149 Fun 4/4
PIANIST
150 Stride
151 PianoBlues1
152 PianoBlues2
153 PianoRag
154 PianoRock&Roll
155 PianoBoogie
156 PianoJazzWaltz
157 PianoJazzBld
158 Arpeggio
159 Musical
160 SlowRock
161 8BtPianoBallad
162 PianoSwing
Style No. Style Name
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 115
Arpeggio List
Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name
01 UpOct1
02 DownOct1
03 UpDnOct2
04 SynArp1
05 SynArp2
06 SyncEcho
07 PulsLine
08 Random
09 Down&Up
10 SuperArp
11 AcidLine
12 TekEcho
13 VelGruv
14 Trance1
15 Trance2
16 SynChord
17 PfArp
18 PfBallad
19 PfChd8th
20 PfShfl
21 PfRock
22 Clavi
23 ChordUp
24 ChdDance
25 Salsa1
26 Salsa2
27 Reggae
28 Strum
29 GuitChd1
30 GuitChd2
31 GuitChd3
32 GuitArp
33 FngrPck1
34 FngrPck2
35 Samba
36 SlapBs
37 AcidBs
38 TranceBs
39 LatinBs
40 FunkyBs
41 PercArp
42 Perc1
43 Perc2
44 African
45 Tamb
46 R&B
47 Funk
48 HipHop
49 Latin
50 Arabic
51 TeenTalC
52 TeenTalD
53 TeenTalE
54 TeenTalF
55 TeenTalG
56 TeenTalA
57 Dadra C
58 Dadra D
59 Dadra E
60 Dadra F
61 Dadra G
62 Dadra A
116 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Music Database List
MDB No. Song Name
POP
001 AlvFever
002 BoySumer
003 CoinLane
004 Croco Rk
005 DayPdise
006 DwnTown
007 EasySday
008 GoMyWay
009 HighTide
010 HoldDown
011 HowDeep!
012 HurryLuv
013 I breath
014 I’m Torn
015 Imagine
016 Infatuat
017 ISurvive
018 JustCall
019 JustWay
020 LeadPack
021 LoveFeel
022 LoveMeT
023 LveMeDo
024 Mi Shell
025 My Baby
026 NikitTrp
027 NoMatter
028 ProudGtr
029 RainOnMe
030 SailngSx
031 SeeAgain
032 Sept.Pop
033 SultanSw
034 Sure
035 SweetLrd
036 ThnkMsic
037 TitanicH
038 UNeedLv
039 UptnGirl
040 WantToBe
041 WatchGrl
042 WhatALoo
043 WhitePle
044 WhleAgn
045 Woman
046 YelowSub
047 YesterPf
ROCK
048 DavAgain
049 JumpRock
050 OyComCha
051 PickUpPc
052 RdRiverR
053 SatsfyGt
054 Sheriff
055 SmokeWtr
056 TwistAgn
057 VenusPop
DANCE
058 2 of Us
059 B Leave
060 Back St
061 Crockett
062 DialEmma
063 DsrtRose
064 FunkyTwn
065 Kids
066 KillSoft
067 Nine PM
068 SingBack
069 StrandD
BALLAD
070 AdelineB
071 ArgenCry
072 BeautBdy
073 Bl Bayou
074 CatMemry
075 CavaSolo
076 E Weiss
077 ElizSere
078 ElvGhett
079 Feeling
080 Fly Away
081 Fnl Date
082 GreenSlv
083 GtCncert
084 HrdToSay
085 IBThere
086 LonlyPan
087 MBoxDnce
088 Mn Rivr
089 My Song
090 NorwWood
091 OnMyMnd
092 OverRbow
093 Red Lady
094 ReleseMe
095 SavingLv
096 Shore Cl
097 SierraMd
098 SilverMn
099 SmokyEye
100 SndOfSil
101 SumerPlc
102 TblWater
103 WhereLov
104 WhisprSx
105 WomanLov
R & B
106 AmazingG
107 BoogiePf
108 Clock Rk
109 CU later
110 GreenDor
111 HappyDay
112 JohnnyB
113 MercySax
114 OldHouse
115 RisingSn
116 S Preems
117 ShookUp
118 SuperStv
119 TeddyBer
120 Yeh Orgn
SWING & JAZZ
121 Alex Rag
122 Blue Set
123 ChooChoo
124 DayOfW&R
125 HighMoon
126 InMood
MDB No. Song Name
127 MistySax
128 MoonLit
129 New York
130 PanthrSw
131 PetiteCl
132 RedRoses
133 SaintMch
134 SatinDll
135 SF Heart
136 ShearJz
137 SplnkyBr
138 SunnySde
139 TstHoney
140 Tunisia
141 TwoFoot5
142 USPatrol
143 WhatsNew
144 Wild Cat
145 WondrLnd
EASY LISTENING
146 Arriva
147 BlackFst
148 ByeBlues
149 CaliBlue
150 CiaoCpri
151 Close2U
152 DAmorStr
153 DolanesM
154 ElCondor
155 Entrtain
156 Frippers
157 LoveLove
158 LuckySax
159 LuvStory
160 MyPrince
161 OSoleMio
162 PupetStr
163 Raindrop
164 RedMouln
165 R’ticGtr
166 Schiwago
167 ShadowGt
168 SingRain
169 SmallWld
170 SpkSoft
171 SpnishEy
172 StrangeN
173 TieRibbn
174 TimeGoes
175 WhteXmas
176 WishStar
177 WondrWld
LATIN
178 BambaLa
179 BeHappy!
180 CopaLola
181 DayNight
182 Ipanema
183 JamboMbo
184 MarinaAc
185 MuchoTrp
186 SmoothLt
187 SunOfLif
188 Sunshine
189 Tico Org
190 TrbWave
MDB No. Song Name
Music Database List
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 117
COUNTRY
191 ABitMore
192 BlownWnd
193 Bonanza
194 BoxerFlt
195 CntryRds
196 GreenGrs
197 Jambala
198 LondonSt
199 LooseEL
200 TopWorld
201 YlwRose
DISCO & PARTY
202 AlhHwaii
203 Babylon
204 Barbados
205 DnceBird
206 FestaMex
207 HandsPty
208 LuvTheme
209 ModrnTlk
210 NxtAlice
211 PalomaFl
212 PubPiano
213 Tijuana
214 Why MCA?
BALLROOM
215 BrazilBr
216 CherryTp
217 DanubeWv
218 MantoStr
219 SandmnFx
220 SpainTwn
221 SundyNvr
222 TangoAc
223 Tea4Two
224 TulipWtz
225 YesSirQk
TRADITIONAL
226 AlpenTri
227 AnchorAw
228 Balalaik
229 BlkSheep
230 CampRace
231 Ceilidh
232 Cielito
233 CielPari
234 Cl Polka
235 Comrades
236 DAmorCl
237 FrogSong
238 Funiculi
239 GrndClok
240 HappyPlk
241 Herzlin
242 HornPipe
243 JacknJil
244 JinglBel
245 Kufstein
246 MexiHat
247 MickMrch
248 RkABaby
249 RlBarrel
250 Showbiz
251 SnowWtz
252 StarMrch
MDB No. Song Name
253 WashPost
254 WdCuttrs
255 XmasWalz
256 YankDood
MDB No. Song Name
118 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM
The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data.
File Name Song Name Composer
001Nutcr.mid Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” P.I. Tchaikovsky
002Orphe.mid “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture J. Offenbach
003Slavo.mid Slavonic Dances op.72-2 A. Dvorák
004Prima.mid La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) A. Vivaldi
005Medit.mid Méditation (Thaïs) J. Massenet
006Guill.mid Guillaume Tell G. Rossini
007Fruhl.mid Frühlingslied F. Mendelssohn
008Ungar.mid Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 J. Brahms
009Fruhl.mid Fruhlingsstimmen J. Strauss II
010Dolly.mid Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening T.Oesten
011Cande.mid La Candeur J.F.Burgmüller
012Arabe.mid Arabesque J.F.Burgmüller
013Pasto.mid Pastorale J.F.Burgmüller
014Petit.mid Petite Réunion J.F.Burgmüller
015Innoc.mid Innocence J.F.Burgmüller
016Progr.mid Progrès J.F.Burgmüller
017Taren.mid Tarentelle J.F.Burgmüller
018Cheva.mid La Chevaleresque J.F.Burgmüller
019Etude.mid Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” F.Chopin
020Marci.mid Marcia alla Turca L.v. Beethoven
021Turki.mid Turkish March W.A. Mozart
022Valse.mid Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” F.Chopin
023Menue.mid Menuett L. Boccherini
024Momen.mid Moments Musicaux op.94-3 F. Schubert
025Enter.mid The Entertainer S. Joplin
026Prelu.mid Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) J.S. Bach
027Violl.mid La Viollette L.Streabbog
028Angel.mid Angels Serenade Traditional
029Saraf.mid Krasnyj Sarafan Traditional
030Ameri.mid America the Beautiful S.A. Ward
031Brown.mid Little Brown Jug Traditional
032Lomon.mid Loch Lomond Traditional
033Bonni.mid My Bonnie Traditional
034Londo.mid Londonderry Air Traditional
035Banjo.mid Ring de Banjo S.C. Foster
036Vogle.mid Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Traditional
037Lorel.mid Die Lorelei F. Silcher
038Funic.mid Funiculi Funicula L. Denza
039Turke.mid Turkey in the Straw Traditional
040Campt.mid Camptown Races S.C. Foster
041Jingl.mid Jingle Bells J.S. Pierpont
042Muss.mid Muss i denn F. Silcher
043Liebe.mid Liebesträume Nr.3 F. Liszt
044Jesu.mid Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring J.S. Bach
045Joy.mid Ode to Joy L.v. Beethoven
046Pearl.mid Pearl Fisher G. Bizet
047Gavot.mid Gavotte F.J. Gossec
048Seren.mid Serenade/Haydn F.J. Haydn
049Menue.mid Menuett BWV. Anh.114 J.S. Bach
050Canon.mid Canon in D J. Pachelbel
051Vogel.mid Der Vogelfanger Bin Ich Ja “Die Xauberflote” W.A Mozart
052Piano.mid Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” L.v. Beethoven
053Surpr.mid The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 F.J. Haydn
054WildR.mid To a Wild Rose E.A. MacDowell
055Chans.mid Chanson du Toreador G. Bizet
056Babbi.mid O Mio Babbino Caro G. Puccini
057RowRo.mid Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) Traditional
058Smoky.mid On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) Traditional
059WeWis.mid We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Traditional
060ImMai.mid Im Mai (DUET) Traditional
061Chris.mid O Christmas Tree (DUET) Traditional
062MaryH.mid Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Traditional
063TenLi.mid Ten Little Indians (DUET) Septimus Winner
064PopGo.mid Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Traditional
065Twink.mid Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Traditional
066Close.mid Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) J.J. Rousseau
067Cucko.mid The Cuckoo (DUET) Traditional
068Augus.mid O du lieber Augustin (DUET) Traditional
069Londo.mid London Bridge (DUET) Traditional
070Three.mid Three Blind Mice (DUET) Traditional
ˇ
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 119
Effect Type List
Harmony Types
Reverb Types
Chorus Types
No. Harmony Type Description
01 Duet
Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the sin-
gle-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto
accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing
songs that contain chord data.
02 Trio
03 Block
04 Country
05 Octave
06 Trill 1/4 note
Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in
time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompani-
ment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo set-
ting (page 27). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect
precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets,
1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets.
The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two
notes are held.
The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four).
The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played.
07 Trill 1/6 note
08 Trill 1/8 note
09 Trill 1/12 note
10 Trill 1/16 note
11 Trill 1/24 note
12 Trill 1/32 note
13 Tremolo 1/4 note
14 Tremolo 1/6 note
15 Tremolo 1/8 note
16 Tremolo 1/12 note
17 Tremolo 1/16 note
18 Tremolo 1/24 note
19 Tremolo 1/32 note
20 Echo 1/4 note
21 Echo 1/6 note
22 Echo 1/8 note
23 Echo 1/12 note
24 Echo 1/16 note
25 Echo 1/24 note
26 Echo 1/32 note
No. Reverb Type Description
01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.
04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.
06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.
08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.
10 Off No effect.
No. Chorus Type Description
01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.
03–04 Flanger 1–2 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.
05 Off No effect.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
120 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Implementation Chart
YAMAHA [ PortaTone ] Date:18-MAY-2007
Model PSR-I425 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0
Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Function...
Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16
Channel Changed x x
Default 3 3
Mode Messages x x
Altered ************** x
Note 0 - 127 0 - 127
Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127
Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127
Note OFF x 9nH,v=0 x
After Key's x x
Touch Ch's x x
Pitch Bend o 0-24 semi o 0-24 semi
0,32 o o Bank Select
1,11,84 x *1 o
6,38 o o Data Entry
7,10 o o
Control 64 o o Sustain
71-74 o o Sound Controller
Change 91,93 o o Effect Depth
96-97 x *1 o RPN Inc,Dec
100-101 o o RPN LSB,MSB
MIDI Implementation Chart
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 121
*1 Refer to #2 on page 122.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No
Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127
Change : True # **************
System Exclusive o o
: Song Pos. x x
Common : Song Sel. x x
: Tune x x
System : Clock o o
Real Time: Commands o o
Aux :All Sound OFF x o(120,126,127)
:Reset All Cntrls x o(121)
:Local ON/OFF x o(122)
:All Notes OFF x o(123-125)
Mes- :Active Sense o o
sages:Reset x x
122 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Data Format
NOTE:
1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions
as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming
data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. How-
ever, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel
voices, auto accompaniment, and songs.
MIDI Master Tuning
System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type
and Chorus Type.
2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be trans-
mitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be trans-
mitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the
Harmony effect.
3 Exclusive
<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H
This message automatically restores all default settings for
the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning.
<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H
This message allows the volume of all channels to be
changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive).
The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values
for “ll” are ignored.)
<MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H,
mm, ll, cc, F7H
This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of
all channels.
The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning.
The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respec-
tively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc”.
<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH,
llH, F7H
mm : Reverb Type MSB
ll : Reverb Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Map (page 122) for details.
<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH,
llH, F7H
mm : Chorus Type MSB
ll : Chorus Type LSB
Refer to the Effect Map (page 122) for details.
4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is trans-
mitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is
transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH
(accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are rec-
ognized.
5 Local ON/OFF
<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F
<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00
Value for “n” is ignored.
Effect map
* When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest
to the specified value) is automatically set.
* The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display.
REVERB
CHORUS
TYPE
MSB
TYPE LSB
00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20
000 No Effect
001 (01)Hall1 (02)Hall2 (03)Hall3
002 Room (04)Room1 (05)Room2
003 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2
004 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2
005...127 No Effect
TYPE
MSB
TYPE LSB
00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20
000...063 No Effect
064 Thru
065 Chorus (02)Chorus2
066 Celeste (01)Chorus1
067 Flanger (03)Flanger1 (04)Flanger2
068...127 No Effect
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 123
Specifications
Keyboards
61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response.
Display
LCD display (backlit)
Setup
STANDBY/ON
MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX
Panel Controls
SONG, VOICE, STYLE, EASY SONG ARRANGER,
PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF, ARPEGGIO ON/
OFF, LESSON L/R, LESSON START, METRONOME ON/
OFF, PORTABLE GRAND, DEMO, FUNCTION, MUSIC
DATABASE, TOUCH ON/OFF, HARMONY ON/OFF,
DUAL ON/OFF, SPLIT ON/OFF, TEMPO/TAP, [0]–[9], [+],
[-], CATEGORY, Dial, ASSIGN, (ACMP ON/OFF), A-B
REPEAT (SYNC STOP), PAUSE (SYNC START), START/
STOP, REW (INTRO/ENDING/rit.), FF (MAIN/AUTO
FILL), REGIST MEMORY ([] (MEMORY/BANK), [1], [2]),
SONG MEMORY (REC, [1]–[5], [A])
Realtime Control
Pitch Bend Wheel
Nobs A, B
A: Cutoff, Reverb, Attack, Style Cutoff, Style Tempo
B: Resonance, Chorus, Release, Style Resonance
Voice
514 Voices (116 Panel Voices + 10 Indian Voices + 361
XGlite Voices + 12 Drum/SFX Kits +15 Arpeggio Voices)
Polyphony: 32
DUAL
SPLIT
Style
162 Preset Styles + 1 User Style File
Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP,
SYNC START, START/STOP,
INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL
Fingering: Multi Finger
Style Volume
Music Database
256
Education Feature
Dictionary
Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn
Registration Memory
•8 banks x 2 types
Function
VOLUME: Style Volume, Song Volume
OVERALL: Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensi-
tivity, Pitch Bend Range
MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,
Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance
DUAL VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,
Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance
SPLIT VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time,
Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance
EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type
HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume
ARPEGGIO: Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio Velocity
SFF Load: Style File Load
PC: PC Mode
MIDI: Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send,
Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out
METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature
Denominator, Metronome Volume
LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L)
UTILITY: Grade, Demo Cancel
Effects
Reverb: 9 types
Chorus: 4 types
Harmony: 26 types
Arpeggio: 62 types
Song
30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM
Songs (70)
Song Clear, Track Clear
Song Volume
Song Control: , A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF,
START/STOP
Performance assistant technology
Recording
Song
User Song: 5 Songs
Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE
MIDI
Local On/Off • Initial Send • External Clock
Keyboard Out • Style Out • Song Out
Auxiliary jacks
PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB, SUSTAIN
Amplifier
2.5W + 2.5W
Speakers
12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2
Power Consumption
10W
Power Supply
Adaptor: Yamaha PA-3C, or an equivalent
Batteries:
Six “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries
Dimensions (W x D x H)
952 x 388 x 146 mm (37-1/2" x 15-1/4" x 5-3/4")
Weight
7.0kg (15 lbs. 7 oz.) (not including batteries)
Included Accessories
Music Rest
Accessory CD-ROM
Owner’s Manual
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for
information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right
to change or modify products or specifications at any time
without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or op-
tions may not be the same in every locale, please check with
your Yamaha dealer.
Optional Accessories
AC Power Adaptor: Yamaha PA-3C, or an equivalent
Footswitch: FC4/FC5
Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L
Headphones: HPE-150
124 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
Index
+, - .................................................. 12, 58
........................................................ 57
0–9 .................................................. 12, 58
A-B REPEAT ................................. 13, 78
ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 12, 34
ARPEGGIO ON/OFF .................... 12, 14
ASSIGN ......................................... 12, 18
CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] .......... 12, 58
DC IN 12V ..................................... 10, 13
DEMO ............................................ 12, 40
Dial ................................................. 12, 58
DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 12, 29
EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 12, 50
FF ................................................... 13, 40
FUNCTION .................................... 12, 82
HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 12, 60
INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 13, 71
KNOB A, B .................................... 12, 18
LESSON L/R ................................. 12, 44
LESSON START ........................... 12, 44
MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 13, 71
MASTER VOLUME ..................... 12, 24
MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 13, 80
METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 12, 63
MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 12, 49
PAUSE ........................................... 13, 40
PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT
ON/OFF ...................................... 12, 23
PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 11, 13
PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 13, 66
PORTABLE GRAND .................... 12, 31
REC, 1–5, A ................................... 13, 52
REGIST MEMORY ....................... 13, 80
................................................. 12, 48
REW ............................................... 13, 40
SONG ............................................. 12, 39
SONG MEMORY .......................... 13, 52
SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 12, 30
STANDBY/ON ...............................11-12
START/STOP ................................ 13, 58
STYLE ........................................... 12, 33
SUSTAIN ....................................... 11, 13
SYNC START ............................... 13, 70
SYNC STOP .................................. 13, 71
TEMPO/TAP .................................. 13, 27
TOUCH ON/OFF ........................... 12, 65
USB ................................................ 13, 86
VOICE ............................................ 12, 28
A
A-B Repeat ...........................................78
Accessories .............................................7
ACMP ...................................................34
Arpeggio ...............................................14
Arpeggio List ......................................115
Arpeggio Type ......................................15
Arpeggio Velocity ................................67
Attack ....................................................20
Auto Accompaniment Range ................34
Auto-Accompaniment ..........................34
AWM ......................................................6
B
Backup ..................................................56
C
CD-ROM ..............................................92
Channel Message ..................................86
Chord .................................. 36, 38, 75-76
Chord Dictionary ..................................77
CHORD ROOT ....................................77
CHORD TYPE .....................................77
Chorus .............................................19, 62
Chorus Type .................................62, 119
Computer ..............................................86
Cutoff ....................................................19
D
Default Setting ......................................82
Delete (Song Track) ..............................55
Delete (User Song) ...............................55
Demo ....................................................40
Demo Cancel ........................................84
Display ..................................................59
Drum Kit ...............................................32
Drum Kit List ......................................111
Dual Voice ............................................29
Dual Voice Chorus Level .....................83
Dual Voice Octave ................................83
Dual Voice Pan .....................................83
Dual Voice Reverb Level .....................83
Dual Voice Volume ..............................83
E
Easy Chords ..........................................38
Easy Song Arranger ..............................50
Effect Map ..........................................122
Effect Type List ..................................119
Evaluation .............................................45
External Song .......................................42
F
Filter ..................................................... 19
Filter (Style) ......................................... 20
Flash Memory ...................................... 42
Foot Switch .......................................... 11
Function .......................................... 82-83
G
Grade .................................................... 45
H
Harmony ............................................... 60
Harmony Type ..................................... 60
Harmony Volume ................................. 69
Headphones .......................................... 11
I
Initial Send ..................................... 84, 89
Initialization ......................................... 56
K
Keyboard Out ....................................... 87
L
Lesson .................................................. 43
Load SFF .............................................. 74
Local ..................................................... 87
L-Part ................................................... 91
M
Main Voice ........................................... 28
Main Voice Chorus Level .................... 83
Main Voice Octave .............................. 83
Main Voice Pan .................................... 83
Main Voice Reverb Level .................... 83
Main Voice Volume ............................. 83
Master EQ Type ................................... 69
Measure ................................................ 59
Melody Voice ................................. 51, 79
Metronome ........................................... 63
MIDI ..................................................... 85
MIDI Data Format ............................. 122
MIDI Implementation Chart .............. 120
Music Database .................................... 49
Music Database List ........................... 116
Music Rest .............................................. 7
Mute ..................................................... 79
N
Notation ................................................ 59
f
r
Panel controls and terminals Alphabetical order
Index
PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 125
O
One Touch Setting ................................ 68
P
PC Mode ............................................... 88
Performance assistant technology ........ 23
Pitch Bend Range ................................. 83
Power Adaptor ..................................... 10
Preset Song ................................39, 41-42
R
Recording ............................................. 52
Registration Memory ........................... 80
Release ................................................. 20
Remote control ..................................... 88
Repeat ................................................... 48
Resonance ............................................ 19
Reverb ............................................ 19, 61
Reverb Type ....................................... 119
R-Part ................................................... 91
S
Save (Panel Setting) ............................. 80
Save (User File) .................................... 91
Score ............................................100-105
SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 89
Software Licensing Agreement ............ 98
Song ...................................................... 39
Song Clear ............................................ 55
Song List ...................................... 41, 118
Song Memory ....................................... 52
Song Out ............................................... 87
Song Volume ........................................ 78
Specifications ..................................... 123
Split Point ....................................... 30, 72
Split Voice ............................................ 30
Split Voice Chorus Level ..................... 83
Split Voice Octave ............................... 83
Split Voice Pan ..................................... 83
Split Voice Reverb Level ..................... 83
Split Voice Volume .............................. 83
Standard Chords ................................... 38
Style ...........................................33-37, 70
Style File .............................................. 74
Style List ............................................ 114
Style Out ............................................... 87
Style Tempo ......................................... 20
Style Volume ........................................ 72
Sustain (Footswitch) ............................. 11
Synchro Start ............................ 34, 36, 70
Synchro Stop ........................................ 71
System Message ................................... 86
T
Tempo ...................................................27
Time Denominator ................................64
Time Numerator ...................................64
Time Signature .....................................63
Touch Response ....................................65
Touch Sensitivity ..................................65
Track ............................................... 52-55
Track Clear ...........................................55
Transfer ........................................... 89-91
Transpose ..............................................66
Troubleshooting (Installation) ..............97
Troubleshooting (Instrument) ...............99
Tuning ...................................................66
U
USB ......................................................86
USB MIDI Driver ........................... 95-96
User file ................................................91
User Song .............................................52
V
Voice .....................................................28
Voice List ...........................................107
X
XGlite .....................................................6
126 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria, CEE Department
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
POLAND
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland
Tel: 022-868-07-57
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
INDIA
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),
Jingan, Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 080-004-0022
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor
Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan
Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2626
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-3273
[PK] 40
U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2007 Yamaha Corporation
WK62010 XXXPOXXX.X-01A0
Printed in China
Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page (English Only)
http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Documenttranscriptie

Owner’s Manual EN 2 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. (battery) The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. PSR-I425 Serial No. (bottom) PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-3C, or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. Power supply/AC power adaptor • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery fluid. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • Keep batteries away from children. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. Battery Location • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. (4)-12 4 • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. 1/2 • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. Handling caution • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Saving data Saving and backing up your data Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. The panel settings and some other types of data is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to the Registration Memory (page 80.) Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to an external device such as a computer. Backing up the external media • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two external media. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your instrument. ● Trademarks • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. (4)-12 2/2 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 5 Copyright Notice The following is the title, credits and copyright notices for the song pre-installed in this electronic keyboard: Composition Title : Against All Odds Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403 Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD / HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited. This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended. Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. Panel Logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). Stereo Sampled Piano The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling technology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system. Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter, which dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength—just a like a real musical instrument! STYLE FILE The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. 6 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-I425 PortaTone! Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument in order to take full advantage of its various features. Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function. Included Accessories The PSR-I425 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • Music rest • Accessory CD-ROM • Owner’s Manual ● Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 7 Special Features of the PSR-I425 ■ Creating New Sounds Page 18 By adjusting just two knobs you can add varying degrees of distortion, “sweetness,” or other characteristics to a sound to change it subtly or drastically. Parameters that can be assigned to the knobs include effect, filter, envelope generator and more. You can create new sounds in real time! ■ Arpeggio Function Page 14 Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this function automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be produced by changing your fingering or the arpeggio type. ■ Performance assistant technology Page 23 Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in time with the music. ■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 28 The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety. ■ Play Along with Styles Page 33 Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new styles to expand your musical horizons. 8 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual PopBossa 104 Contents Copyright Notice .................................................................... 6 Panel Logos ........................................................................... 6 Included Accessories ............................................................. 7 Special Features of the PSR-I425 ......................................... 8 Setting Up 10 Power Requirements ........................................................... 10 Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)........... 11 Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) .......................... 11 Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) ......................... 11 Turning the Power On.......................................................... 11 Panel Controls and Terminals 12 Front Panel .......................................................................... 12 Rear Panel ........................................................................... 13 Quick Guide Creating Arpeggios 14 Create Original Sounds 18 Assigning Effects to the Knobs ............................................ 18 Using the Knobs................................................................... 21 The Easy Way to Play Piano 23 Play with Both Hands........................................................... 23 Change the Song Tempo..................................................... 27 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 28 Select and Play a Voice—MAIN .......................................... 28 Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL............................ 29 Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands —SPLIT .......................................................................... 30 Play the Grand Piano Voice................................................. 31 Drum Kits 32 Select and Play the Drum Kit ............................................... 32 Playing Styles 33 Select a Style Rhythm.......................................................... 33 Play Along with a Style ........................................................ 34 Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords.................................. 38 Using Songs 39 Select and Listen to a Song ................................................. 39 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause.................... 40 Types of Songs .................................................................... 42 Select a Song For a Lesson 43 Lesson 1—Waiting............................................................... 43 Lesson 2—Your Tempo ....................................................... 46 Lesson 3—Minus One ......................................................... 47 Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn........................ 48 Play Using the Music Database 49 Change a Song’s Style 50 Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger.............. 50 Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 50 Record Your Own Performance 52 Track Configuration.............................................................. 52 Recording Procedure ........................................................... 52 Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ...................................... 55 Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song............................................................ 55 Backup and Initialization 56 Backup ................................................................................. 56 Initialization .......................................................................... 56 Basic Operation and Displays 57 Basic Operation ................................................................... 57 Display Items ....................................................................... 59 Reference Adding Effects 60 Harmony............................................................................... 60 Adding Reverb ..................................................................... 61 Adding Chorus ..................................................................... 62 Handy Performance Features 63 The Metronome.................................................................... 63 Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat .......................................... 64 Adjusting the Metronome Volume ........................................ 64 Tap Start .............................................................................. 65 Touch Response Sensitivity................................................. 65 Pitch Bend............................................................................ 66 Pitch Controls....................................................................... 66 Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics....... 67 One Touch Setting ............................................................... 68 Adjusting the Harmony Volume............................................ 69 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ............................. 69 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 70 Pattern Variation (Sections) ................................................. 70 Adjusting the Style Volume .................................................. 72 Setting the Split Point........................................................... 72 Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) ................................................... 73 Loading Style Files............................................................... 74 Chord Basics........................................................................ 75 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary .................. 77 Song Settings 78 Song Volume........................................................................ 78 A-B Repeat........................................................................... 78 Muting Independent Song Parts........................................... 79 Change the Melody Voice .................................................... 79 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 80 Saving to the Registration Memory ...................................... 80 Recalling a Registration Memory ......................................... 81 The Functions 82 Selecting and Setting Functions........................................... 82 Connecting to a Computer 85 What Is MIDI? ...................................................................... 85 Connecting a Personal Computer ........................................ 86 Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer..... 87 Remote Control of MIDI Devices.......................................... 88 Initial Send ........................................................................... 89 Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument... 89 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 92 Important Notices about the CD-ROM ................................. 92 CD-ROM Contents ............................................................... 93 System Requirements.......................................................... 94 Software Installation............................................................. 94 Appendix Troubleshooting................................................................. 99 Scores ............................................................................... 100 Let’s play the Tabla.......................................................... 106 Voice List .......................................................................... 107 Drum Kit List .................................................................... 111 Style List ........................................................................... 114 Arpeggio List.................................................................... 115 Music Database List ........................................................ 116 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM ................... 118 Effect Type List ................................................................ 119 MIDI Implementation Chart ............................................. 120 MIDI Data Format ............................................................. 122 Specifications................................................................... 123 Index.................................................................................. 124 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 9 Setting Up Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. ■ Using an AC Power Adaptor  Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the instrument is set to STANDBY. WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (PA-3C, or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument.  Connect the AC power adaptor to the power supply jack.  Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms.   Adaptor AC outlet For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, make sure to replace all batteries, following the precautions listed below. If necessary, also make sure to save all important User data (see page 56), since custom panel settings are lost when the batteries are removed. CAUTION ■ Using Batteries  Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel.  Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment.  Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. NOTE • Connecting the AC power adaptor automatically supplies power from the adaptor and overrides battery power, even when batteries are installed. 10 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual • Use only manganese or alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may exhibit a sudden drop in power when the batteries are low, possibly resulting in a loss of flash memory data. • Be sure to install the batteries in the same direction, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals. • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. • If the instrument will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries to prevent possible fluid leakage. • Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost. Setting Up Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on. Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) The PSR-I425 speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. WARNING • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. CAUTION • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer performance data and song files between the two (page 86). To use the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the following: • First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the instrument to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the instrument. • Install the USB MIDI driver on your computer. Installation of the USB MIDI driver is described on page 94. NOTE • Make sure to purchase a quality USB cable at a musical instrument store, computer store or electrical appliance store. Turning the Power On Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again to turn the power OFF. Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. CAUTION • Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in data loss. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 11 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel Song Category List (page 41) q w @3 @4 @5 Style Category List (page 114) e r t y u i !0 @6 @7 @8 !2 !3 !4 !5 o !1 @9 #0 Display (page 59) GrandPno 001 001 #1 #4 w [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 11, 24 e [TOUCH ON/OFF] button ................ page 65 r [HARMONY ON/OFF] button .......... page 60 t [DUAL ON/OFF] button ................... page 29 !5 [PORTABLE GRAND] button .......... page 31 !6 Dial ............................................pages 58, 82 !7 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons......................................pages 58, 82 r q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 11 !4 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button ..... page 63 f Front Panel !8 [SONG] button................................. page 39 y [SPLIT ON/OFF] button ................... page 30 !9 [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button............................................... page 50 u [DEMO] button ................................. page 40 @0 [STYLE] button................................ page 33 i LESSON [START] button ................ page 44 @1 [VOICE] button ................................ page 28 o LESSON [L/R] button ...................... page 44 @2 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] buttons ....................pages 58, 82 !0 [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button.......... page 14 !1 [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button .......... page 23 @3 [ASSIGN] button.............................. page 18 !2 [FUNCTION] button ......................... page 82 @5 [ ](REPEAT & LEARN)/ [ACMP ON/OFF] button ...........pages 48, 34 !3 [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 49 12 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual @4 [A] and [B] knobs ............................ page 21 Panel Controls and Terminals Music Database List (page 116) !7 !6 #2 Voice Category List (page 107) !8 !9 @0 @1 @2 #3 #5 Rear Panel #6 @6 [A-B REPEAT]/ [SYNC STOP] button ............... pages 78, 71 @7 [PAUSE]/ [SYNC START] button ............. pages 40, 70 @8 [REW]/ [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .... pages 40, 71 #7 #8 #9 Rear Panel #6 USB terminal ............................pages 11, 86 #7 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 11 #8 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 11 #9 DC IN 12V jack................................. page 10 @9 [FF]/ [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ....... pages 40, 71 #0 [START/STOP] button ....... pages 33, 40, 58 #1 [TEMPO/TAP] button ....................... page 27 #2 REGIST MEMORY [●] (MEMORY/BANK), [1], [2] buttons ................................. page 80 #3 SONG MEMORY [REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 52 #4 PITCH BEND wheel ......................... page 66 #5 Drum Kit icons................................. page 32 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 13 e d ck Gui ui Q Creating Arpeggios Quick Guide The arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by simply playing the required notes on the keyboard. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—and the arpeggio function will automatically create a variety of interesting arpeggiotype phrases. By changing the arpeggio type and the notes you play it is possible to create a wide range of patterns and phrases that can be used for music production as well as performance. 1 Press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeggio function on. GrandPno 001 001 The ARPEGGIO icon appears when the arpeggio function is on. ● Voices and the Arpeggio Function This instrument lets you select a variety of “voices” that you can play via the keyboard. When you select a voice number between 129 and 143 the arpeggio function will automatically be engaged so you can start playing arpeggios immediately. The arpeggio function will automatically be turned off when you select any other voice. If you want to use voices 129–143 for normal performance without the arpeggio function, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn the arpeggio function off after selecting the voice. ● Voices for which the arpeggio function is automatically turned on. Voice No. 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 14 Voice Name Teen Tal C Teen Tal F Teen Tal A Dadra D Dadra E Dadra G Synth Sequence Chord Sequence PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 Voice Name Square Pulse Trance Synth Echo Piano Arpeggio Guitar Chord Guitar Arpeggio Massive Percussion NOTE • See “Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices” on page 28. Creating Arpeggios 2 Select an arpeggio type. The most suitable arpeggio type is automatically selected when you select a voice, but you can easily select any other arpeggio type. ARP Type Hold for longer than a second DownOct1 02 The currently selected arpeggio type Hold the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button for longer than a second and the name of the current arpeggio type will appear in the display. Rotate the dial to select the desired arpeggio type. A list of the available arpeggio types is provided on page 115. 3 Play the keyboard. The sound of the arpeggio produced will change according to the number of notes you play and the area of the keyboard you play in. You can save the instrument’s settings at this point and then recall them at any time you want to repeat your performance (page 80). You can also record your performance (page 52). NOTE • Make sure that you are not pressing any of the keyboard’s keys while turning the arpeggio function on or off. The arpeggio function applies only to the main and dual voices, and does not affect split voices. The arpeggio function cannot be used at the same time as the harmony function. 4 When you have finished playing with the arpeggio function, press the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button to turn it off. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 15 Creating Arpeggios Create a Pop Tune You can play a style and specify the style chords with your left hand while playing arpeggios with your right hand to create interesting sonic textures and backgrounds. 1 Select the keyboard voice (page 28). For this example we’ll use a grand piano voice, so press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. This convenient voice selection method lets you instantly select a voice with a single button press. 2 After turning the arpeggio function on, select an arpeggio type (steps 1 and 2 on the preceding page). For this example select “02 DownOct1”. That completes preparation to use the arpeggio function. 3 Select the style you want to play along with the arpeggio function. A “style” is an automatic accompaniment pattern. Press the [STYLE] button and the name of the currently selected style will appear in the display. Rotate the dial to select the desired style. For this example we’ll use the “001 8BtModrn” (8 Beat Modern) style. 8BtModrn 001 NOTE • Refer to “Playing Styles” on page 33. 16 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Creating Arpeggios 4 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. 8BtModrn 001 The ACMP ON icon will appear. When auto accompaniment is turned on, the left-hand section of the keyboard is used only for specifying accompaniment chords. NOTE • Refer to “When automatic accompaniment is on ...” on page 34. 5 Press the [START/STOP] button. The rhythm accompaniment will start. 6 Begin playing. C Am F G7sus4 Listen carefully to the rhythm of the style, then play the notes shown in the score at the beginning of a measure. The style and arpeggio will begin playing together. The accompaniment will change accordingly each time you play a new left-hand chord. Of course you can also change your right-hand fingering to produce interesting changes. If you’re not comfortable with right-hand playing yet, you could use the performance assistant technology feature described on page 23. When the performance assistant feature is on, playing any right-hand key will always produce musically appropriate notes! Split point Whenever you’re playing a style as well as a right-hand part, be sure that your left hand plays only to the left of the split point and your right hand plays only to the right of the split point. (page 30) PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 17 e d ck Gui ui Q Create Original Sounds The two knobs located in the lower left area of the panel can be used to add variations to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a variety of musical ways. Filter, envelope generator, and other effects can be assigned to the two knobs as required. In this section we’ll explain how effects can be assigned to the knobs, and provide a few tips for their use. Assigning Effects to the Knobs Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially select the five effect combinations provided: z → x → c → v → b → z → ... etc. The currently selected combination is shown in the display. GrandPno 001 001 Number/Effect Knob A Knob B z Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance x Effect Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level c EG Attack Time Release Time v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect– The assignable knob effects are pre-programmed in the pairs listed above. It is not possible to assign different effect combinations. z–c affect the main and dual voices only. Split voices will not be affected. Styles and songs will also not be affected. v–b affect styles only. 18 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Create Original Sounds z Filter Filter effects shape sound by allowing only a specified range of frequencies to pass and/or by producing a resonance peak at the filter’s “cutoff” frequency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizer-like sounds. * Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass frequencies. Some hints for using the filter effects are provided on page 22. Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance Knob A adjusts the filter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the brightness of the sound. Level Cutoff Frequency Frequency Frequencies in this range are passed. Frequencies in this range are cut off. Knob B adjusts the amount of resonance applied at the filter’s cutoff frequency. Increasing the resonance emphasizes the frequencies at the cutoff frequency, and thus “strengthens” the perceived effect of the filter. Level Resonance Frequency x Effect Reverb reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or club, while chorus produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect. Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level Knob A adjusts the depth of the reverb effect, and Knob B adjusts the depth of the chorus effect. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 19 Create Original Sounds c EG (Envelope Generator) Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of the sound varies over time. You can make the attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or shorten the sustain to most ideally match the music. Attack Time Release Time Knob A adjusts attack time (the amount of time it takes the sound to reach maximum level when a key is played). Knob B adjusts release time (the amount of time it takes for the sound to decay to silence after a key is released). Level Sustain Level ATTACK DECAY Key Played RELEASE Time Key Released v Style Filter Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance In this case the knobs apply the filter effect to the style being played. Knob A and Knob B have the same functions as for “z Filter” described on the preceding page. b Style Tempo Tempo –No Effect– Knob A adjusts the tempo of the style and arpeggios. Rotating the knob clockwise increases the tempo while rotating it counterclockwise decreases the tempo. The knob’s center position produces the initial default tempo. 20 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Create Original Sounds Using the Knobs 1 Select the voice you want to play on the keyboard. SquareLd 097 The name of the currently selected voice will appear in the display when you press the [VOICE] button. Use the dial to select the desired voice. For this example we want to use a synth-lead type voice, so select “97 SquareLd” (Square-wave Lead). 2 Press the [ASSIGN] button as many times as necessary to select “z FILTER” (“z” will appear in the display). SquareLd 097 “z” appears here. Knob A can now be used to adjust the filter cutoff frequency, and Knob B can be used to adjust the resonance. 3 Rotate Knob B to its maximum setting (all the way to the right). Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance Rotating the knob to the right while the volume is set to a high level can result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce the volume level. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 21 Create Original Sounds 4 Play with the right hand while operating Knob A with the left hand. Filter Cutoff Filter Resonance If you select a different keyboard voice the knobs will be reset and the ideal settings for the selected voice will be automatically recalled. In the same way, if the “v STYLE FILTER” effect is selected, the knobs will be reset if a different style is selected. If you create an original setting you like, it might be a good idea to save it in the instrument’s Registration Memory (page 80) so you can recall the same settings again at any time. You can also record performances using original sounds you’ve created (page 52). The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects that can be assigned to the knobs. Changing the knob settings does not immediately change the sound. Newly assigned effects will only change the sound when the knobs are first operated after the new effect has been selected. ● Some Ideas for Using the Knobs Number/Effect Try This z FILTER Select a synth-type lead or pad voice (page 107). Turn Knob B all the way up and operate Knob A while playing for some spacey, floating 1980’s effects. x EFFECT Select a voice that sounds as though it already has reverb and chorus effects applied, and turn Knob A and Knob B all the way down to hear the “direct” sound of the voice. You can then turn the Knob A and Knob B settings up to add extra impact and richness to the voice. c EG Select a piano voice, and turn Knob B all the way up and Knob A to about the 3 o’clock position. This should give you a majestic, organ-like sound. The attack time is quite long so play the keys and hold them to let the sound come in fully. Ideal for slow pieces. v STYLE FILTER Select style 31, Euro Trance. Turn accompaniment on and start style playback (page 34). Set Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The overall sound of the style should be a bit muffled, with the drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact. b STYLE TEMPO Play a style and/or arpeggio (page 14) and use Knob A to adjust the tempo. 22 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q The Easy Way to Play Piano This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any notes and still sound good! So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun. It’s never too late to start learning! Refer to page 25 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play. Play with Both Hands 1 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The P.A.T. icon and “PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT” will be displayed. Nocturne 011 Icon will appear when performance assistant technology is on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/ OFF] button to turn the function on or off. 2 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial or other selection controls to select a different song. For this example try selecting the “010 AveMaria”. Song name AveMaria 010 Song number The song displayed here will be played. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 23 The Easy Way to Play Piano ● What is a “Song”? Of course you know the normal meaning of the word, but for this instrument the term “song” also refers to the data that makes up a piece of music. You can listen to the songs, use them for lessons, and use them with a range of other functions (page 39). 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. Adjusts volume. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to four measures while memorizing the basic pattern. It’s your tune to play the part from the fifth measure. 4 Play on the keyboard. Play the score on the left along with the accompaniment using both hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. Performance assistant technology will make sure that the notes will come out as if they were played according to the score on the right. Keep playing, and performance assistant technology will continue to “correct” the notes that you play. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 24 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 5 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. The complete score for Ave Maria is provided on page 102. Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro! To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately with your left and right hands (any notes will do). You will get even better results if you match your left-hand rhythm to the rhythm of the chord indicator in the display. Sounds like you’re playing the right notes! How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you play thanks to performance assistant technology! Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of playing produce different results. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 1. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 2. ● Play alternately with the left and right hands—type 3. Play 1 note at a time with your right hand (for example: index finger → middle finger → ring finger). Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a melody with your right ... or any other combination. To use the performance assistant technology feature it is necessary to play a song that includes chord data, or a style with auto accompaniment on. If a song includes the required data, the chords are shown on the right side of the display (page 59). PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 25 The Easy Way to Play Piano Next try playing the Chopin Nocturne. 1 The procedure is that same as that described for playing Ave Maria on pages 23–25. Select “011 Nocturne”. Nocturne 011 2 Listen to eight measures, then begin playing from the ninth measure. Play the keys shown in the illustration. Keep playing F, A and C with your left hand and the correct notes will sound as the song proceeds. When you get used to playing the left hand part, refer to “The Easy Way to Play Piano” on page 23 and try adding the right-hand part. 3 Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. The complete score for Nocturne is provided on page 104. 26 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano Change the Song Tempo When using the performance assistant technology or in other situations in which the tempo of the song is too fast or too slow for you, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute. Tempo 090 Current tempo value You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons. ● About the Beat Display The arrow marks in the beat display flash in time with the rhythm of the song or style. First beat of measure Second beat Third beat Fourth beat PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 27 e d ck Gui ui Q Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide variety of musical sounds. Select and Play a Voice—MAIN This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The voice number and name will be displayed. Voice name GrandPno 001 Appears when the Voice mode is engaged. Voice number Select the voice you want to play. NOTE • You can also select the voice using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons after pressing the [VOICE] button. (page 58) f While watching the displayed voice name rotate the dial. The available voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected here becomes the main voice. For this example select the “092 Flute” voice. r 2 Flute 092 3 Play the keyboard. Try selecting and playing a variety of voices. 28 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Select 092 Flute Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. The second voice is known as the “dual” voice. 1 Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button. The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off. When turned on the dual voice icon will appear in the display. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. NOTE • The dual voice feature cannot be used during a song lesson (page 43). Flute 092 Dual voice icon Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. D.Voice Hold for longer than a second Marimba 110 3 NOTE • You can also select the Dual Voice display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the “D.Voice” item. f “D.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected dual voice will be displayed. r 2 The currently selected dual voice Select the desired dual voice. Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice. For this example try selecting the “109 Vibraphone” voice. Vibes 109 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 29 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 4 Play the keyboard. Two voices will sound at the same time. Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices. Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 72). Split point Split voice 1 Main voice and dual voice Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button. The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off. When turned on the split voice icon will appear in the display. The currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split point. NOTE • The split voice feature cannot be used during a song lesson (page 43). Flute 092 Split voice icon S.Voice NOTE • You can also select the Split Voice display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the “S.Voice” item. f “S.VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected split voice will be displayed. r 2 Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. FngrBass Hold for longer than a second 30 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 042 The currently selected SPLIT voice Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 3 Select the desired split voice. Watch the displayed split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example try selecting the “033 Folk Guitar” voice. Folk Gtr 033 4 Play the keyboard. Try selecting and playing a range of split voices. Play the Grand Piano Voice When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected. NOTE • When you press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button all settings other than touch sensitivity are turned off. The dual and split voices will also be turned off, so only the Grand Piano voice will play over the entire keyboard. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 31 ck Gui ui Q e d Drum Kits This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys, eerie effects, and much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties. Select and Play the Drum Kit Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When drum kits (Voice numbers 117–128, 152, 153) are selected, you can play different percussion sounds directly from the keyboard. 1 2 Press the [VOICE] button. Select the desired Drum kit. Select one of the Voice numbers from 117–128, 152, 153 by rotating the dial. Example: 117 Standard Kit 1 Std.Kit1 ui ca Tr Mut ia ng e l Sh e M u ak er te C G C o L ar ac as M og Ag ui ro Sh o la ve rt s n pe L O le H ba m Ti L o ga ng on C Bo i-H H H at C lo se d Pe i-H da l at O pe n C ra sh C R ym id e ba C ym l 1 ba Ta l1 m bo u C ow rine be ll Vi br as la p p at C d i-H H H an St la ick im n de Si pe O ne s ick St ta as C R t ap Sl Ta p h h us us Br Br Sh ot 117 H lic k h C h us q us Br Br Se S Ta wir l p Sn Sw ar irl e Sn R ar oll e S Ki o f t ck Ki Sof t ck Ti gh t Ki ck S n Sn ar are e Fl T oo igh r t Fl Tom oo rT L om Lo H w M To id m T M om id L To C H mH hi ig n h R ese To id C m e C ym y Sp mb bal la al C C sh C up ra sh ym ba C y R id mb l e C al 2 ym ba C Bo l 2 on ng ga o H H M C ute on Ti ga m L ba l Ag e H og o Sa C H m ba ab Sa W asa h m ba istl W eH h G istle W uiro L oo L d on W Blo g oo ck d B H C loc ui ca k L Tr O ia ng pe n le O Ji ng pen le B Be ells ll T re e C3 * When Voice number 117 is selected, the icons printed above the keyboard indicates the instruments assigned to each key. 3 Try out each key. You’ll hear bongo drums, congas, maracas, and more-a comprehensive variety of drum and percussion sounds. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each drum kit can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 111. ● Drum Kit List 117 118 119 120 121 32 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 122 123 124 125 126 Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit 127 128 152 153 SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Tabla Kit Indian Kit e d ck Gui ui Q Playing Styles This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 162 different styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures (see page 114 for a complete list of the available styles). In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features. Select a Style Rhythm Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—indian, rock, blues, Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The style number and name will appear in the display. Style Name 8BtModrn 001 This icon appears when a style number and name is displayed. Style Number 2 Select a style. Use the dial to select the style you want to use. A list of all the available styles is provided on page 114. PopBossa 104 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. The style rhythm will start playing. Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback. NOTE • Style numbers 138, 150–162 have no rhythm part and therefore no rhythm will play if you use them for the above example. For these styles first turn auto accompaniment on as described on page 34, press the [SYNC START] button, and the accompaniment bass and chord parts will begin playing when you play a key to the left of the keyboard split point. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 33 Playing Styles Play Along with a Style You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page. Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style. Turn automatic accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. PopBossa 104 This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. NOTE ● When automatic accompaniment is on ... The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the “auto accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the accompaniment chords. • The keyboard split point can be changed as required: refer to page 72. Split point (54 : F#2) Auto accompaniment range 3 Turn sync start on. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on. PopBossa 104 Flashes when sync start is on. When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function off. 34 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles 4 Play a left-hand chord to start the style. You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords. This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try playing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point. The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you play. Try this! Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 36. These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progressions sound good with the styles. Split point Auto accompaniment range 5 Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody with your right hand. Split point Auto accompaniment range 6 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback when you’re done. You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment. Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 70. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 35 Playing Styles Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment. In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall feel of the music you play. On page 34 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take your accompaniments to a new level. On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively creating a complete song. ■Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Play the scores with the left hand. Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 34. * The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to produce the chord progressions. Split point Play to the left of the split point. Recommended Style 031 Euro Trance —Dance music with simple chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. F C G Am This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending. 36 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Recommended Style 155 Piano Boogie —3-chord boogie-woogie— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. C F C G F C Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords! Recommended Style 103 Bossa Nova —Bossa nova with jazz-style chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Dm Bm7 5 G7 CM7 FM7 E7 Am A7 This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 37 Playing Styles Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords: ● Easy Chords ● Standard Chords The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. This function is called Multi Fingering. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 34). The keyboard to the left of the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this area of the keyboard. Split point (default: 54/F#2) Db Eb F# G# Bb Db Eb F# C D E F GA B C D E F Accompaniment range Root notes and the corresponding keys ■Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. ■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. ● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords] C (9) C C C M7 C M7 (9) C6 C6 (b5) C7 (#11) (9) C M7 C sus4 Cm Cm C (b5) ) ) C M7 ( ( ) • To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. ( Cm ( ( ) ) • To play a major chord Press the root note of the chord. C aug C M7aug C m6 C m7 C mM7 C mM7 ( ) ( • To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). (9) (9) (11) C m7 C m7 (9) (b5) C m7 C mM7 C7 C7 ) (9) C7 ) ) C7 (#9) (b5) C7 ( C 7sus4 C7 ) ) ) ( ( ) (13) C7 ( C 1+2+5 ( ) C 7aug (b13) (b9) ( (#11) C7 C dim7 C dim ( (b5) ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ( ) C m7 ) • To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. * Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. 38 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Using Songs With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The songs are organized by category. In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly describe the 30 songs provided. Song Listen Lesson Record Select and Listen to a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button. The song number and name will be displayed. You can use the dial to select a different song. Nocturne 011 The currently selected song and number are displayed 2 Select a song. Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 41. Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to. ForElise NOTE • You can also play songs you have recorded yourself (User Songs) or songs that have been transferred to the instrument from a computer in the same way that you play the internal songs. 012 The song displayed here can be played PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 39 Using Songs 3 001–030 Built in Songs (see next page) 031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself). 036– Songs transferred from a computer (pages 89–91) Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button again. Song start! ● Using the [DEMO] button Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs 001–008 in sequence. Playback will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song (001). You can select a song by using the [-] and [+] buttons after pressing the [DEMO] button. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] button. Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF], rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song. NOTE • When an A-B repeat range is specified the fast reverse and forward function will only work within that range. PAUSE Press the pause button to pause playback. 40 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual REW Press the fast reverse button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the song. FF Press the fast forward button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the song. Using Songs ● Song List These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s easy song arranger feature, songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Suggested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used. Category Main Demo Voice Demo Function Demo Piano Solo Piano Ensemble Piano Accompaniment CHORD No. Name 1 CHORD Bhajan Demo 2 CHORD Bhangra Demo 3 CHORD South Indian Folk Demo 4 CHORD Grand Piano Demo 5 CHORD Sweet! TenorSax Demo 6 CHORD Cool! RotorOrgan Demo 7 CHORD Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo 8 CHORD ModernHarp & Sweet Soprano Demo 9 CHORD Hallelujah Chorus 10 CHORD Ave Maria 11 CHORD Nocturne op.9-2 12 For Elise 13 Maple Leaf Rag 14 The Last Rose of Summer 15 CHORD Amazing Grace 16 CHORD Die Lorelei 17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. 18 CHORD Scarborough Fair 19 CHORD Old Folks at Home 20 CHORD Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403) 21 CHORD Ep Ballad 22 CHORD Boogie Woogie 23 CHORD Rock Piano 24 CHORD Salsa 25 CHORD Country Piano 26 CHORD Gospel R&B 27 CHORD Medium Swing 28 CHORD Jazz Waltz 29 CHORD Medium Bossa 30 CHORD SlowRock Suggested Uses The songs in this category are original Indian songs. They’re designed for your listening pleasure and provide a wonderful introduction to the advanced capabilities of this instrument. These songs features some of the instrument’s many useful voices. They make maximum use of the characteristics of each voice, and might serve as inspiration for your own compositions. Use these songs to experience some of the instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the performance assistant technology feature. These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as lesson songs. A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also well suited for use as lesson songs. When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited to play with a band. These songs allow you to practice backing parts one hand at a time, which can be the easiest way to master this important skill. : Includes chord data. The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, and song 20 which are copyrighted, are provided in the Song Book on the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual. Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 41 Using Songs Types of Songs The following three types of songs can be used by the PSR-I425. ● Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument) ................Song numbers 001–030. ● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035. ● External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–. * The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 90 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument. The chart below shows the basic PSR-I425 processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song files—from storage to playback. Computer Your own performance External song file Record Transfer (page 52) (page 90) External song files can be saved to flash memory (036–134). PSR-I425 Song Storage locations Preset Songs (001–030) User Songs (031–035) Flash Memory (036–134) The 30 songs built into the instrument. Stored in the internal flash memory. Save to internal flash memory. Currently available. Play 42 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Different flash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song files transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the external song file flash memory area, and vice versa. e d ck Gui ui Q Select a Song For a Lesson Yamaha Education Suite You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) downloaded from the Internet and saved to flash memory. (pages 89–91) During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle. It’s never too late to start learning! Lesson Flow: Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category! Select the song you want to learn. Select the part you want to work on (right hand, left hand, both hands). Select lesson 1, 2, or 3. Lesson start! The practice methods: ● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes. ● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. ● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song. Lesson 1—Waiting In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you play the right note. 1 Select a song for your lesson. Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want to use for your lesson. As listed on page 42 there are a variety of song types. For this example try selecting the “012 ForElise”. ForElise 012 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 43 Select a Song For a Lesson 2 3 Select the part you want to practice. Each time you press the LESSON [L/R] button the parts are selected in sequence: right hand → left hand → both hands → right hand .... The currently selected part is shown in the display. Right Right-hand lesson Left Left-hand lesson BothHand Both-hands lesson Start Lesson 1. Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 …. The currently selected mode is shown in the display. Waiting (Lesson 1) r1 YourTemp (Lesson 2) r2 MinusOne (Lesson 3) r3 ForElise (Song Lesson off) 012 Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1. 44 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Start the lesson! Select a Song For a Lesson Play the note shown in the display. When you play the correct note, the next note you need play is shown. The song will wait until you play the correct note. Waiting r1 Left-hand part In this case “r1” indicate that right-hand lesson 1 has been selected. 007 Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 4 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2. ■See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ~~~~~~~~ Excellent Very Good ~~~~~~ ~~~~ Good ~~ OK When the lesson song has played all the way through your performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. NOTE • The evaluation feature can be turned off via the FUNCTION Grade item (page 84). PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 45 Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 2—Your Tempo Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on pages 43, 44). 2 Start Lesson 2. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... YourTemp r2 Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected. In this case “r2” indicate that righthand lesson 2 has been selected. Start the lesson! Play the note shown in the display. Try to play the notes at the correct timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original tempo. Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3. 46 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 3—Minus One Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 2 on pages 43, 44). 2 Start Lesson 3. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... MinusOne r3 Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected. In this case “r3” indicate that righthand lesson 3 has been selected. Start the lesson! Play the note shown in the display. Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 47 Select a Song For a Lesson Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button during a lesson. The song location will move back four measures from the point at which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-measure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you pressed the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button, and then jump back four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all you have to do is press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it right. e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback q w Song playback direction Press immediately Oops! A mistake! 48 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You can change the number of measures the Repeat and learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. e d ck Gui ui Q Play Using the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. AlvFever 001 A Music Database name will appear in the display. 2 Select a Music Database. Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 116 of the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For this example select the “124 DayOfW&R”. DayOfW&R 124 3 Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point (page 30). Refer to page 38 for information about playing chords. Split Point Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 49 e d ck Gui ui Q Change a Song’s Style In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by changing the style with which a song is played. You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for a complete change of image. Listen to the DEMO Song for Easy Song Arranger The “Hallelujah Chorus” in the preset songs lets you experience the Easy Song Arranger. Playing it. Press the [SONG] button, then select a “009 Hallelujah Chorus” by using the dial. Press the [START/STOP] button to play it. Halleluj 009 As the song progresses, you will see only the style changes while the song remains the same. Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other songs as well—any songs that include chord data. Using the Easy Song Arranger 1 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The song number and name will be displayed. Halleluj 009 2 50 Select a Song. Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual The currently selected song number and name are displayed here. Change a Song’s Style 3 Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move on to the next step while the song is playing. Song start! 4 NOTE • When playing song numbers 010, 011 and 020 to 030 while using the Easy Song Arranger, melody tracks will be automatically muted and no melody will sound. In order to hear the melody tracks you will need to press the SONG MEMORY buttons [3] to [5]. Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The style number and name will be displayed. PopShf 1 015 5 6 The currently selected style number and name are displayed here. Select a style. Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles. As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only the styles change. When you have selected a suitable style move on to the next step while the song is still playing (if you have stopped the song, start it again by pressing the [START/STOP] button). Select a voice you want to play as a song melody. NOTE • Because the Easy Song Arranger uses song data you can’t specify chords by playing in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/ OFF] button will not function. • If the time signature of the song and style are different, the time signature of the song will be used. Press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected voice number and name will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different voice. GrandPno 001 7 The currently selected voice number and name are displayed here. Change the song’s melody voice. Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. After SONG MELODY VOICE appears on the display the voice you selected in step 6 becomes the song’s melody voice. SONG MEL Hold for longer than a second PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 51 e d ck Gui ui Q Record Your Own Performance You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as user songs 031 through 035. The recorded song can be played back on the instrument. ■ Recordable Data You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track. Each track can be recorded individually. ● Melody Track [1]–[5].......... Record the melody parts. ● Style Track [A] ................... Records the chord part. NOTE • Up to approximately 10,000 notes can be recorded if you record only to the melody tracks. Up to approximately 5,500 chord changes can be recorded if you record only to the style track. Track Configuration To record your own performance, first use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the track(s) you want to record on. The track you record on determines the part that plays back later. Melody • Track [1]—Will play back as the right-hand melody part (MELODY R) Chords Specify track(s) and record • Track [2]—Will play back as the left-hand melody part (MELODY L) • Tracks [3]–[5]—Will play back as “other” performance data. Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 • Track [A]—Will play back as the Style (auto-accompaniment) part. Track A NOTE Right-hand melody Left-hand melody Other performance data • The Difference Between MELODY R and MELODY L … Songs are a combination of a melody and an auto-accompaniment style. Normally “melody” refers to the right-hand part, but in this instrument “melody” parts are provided for both the right and left hands. MELODY R is the melody part played by the right hand, and MELODY L is the melody part played by the left hand. Style The parts played by each track when a user song is played back. Recording Procedure 1 Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you want to record to. User 1 031 52 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Rotate the dial to select a song number between 031 and 035. Record Your Own Performance 2 Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your selection on the display. ◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track Together Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button. The selected tracks will flash in the display. NOTE • Style accompaniment is automatically turned on when you select the style track [A] for recording. • Style accompaniment cannot turned on or off while recording is in progress. User 1 001 rEC CAUTION • If you record to a track that contains previously-recorded data the previous data will be overwritten and lost. Press and hold ◆ Record a Melody track Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. The selected track will flash in the display. User 1 • If you use a split voice for recording, notes played to the left of the split point will not be recorded. NOTE • If style accompaniment is on and track [A] has not yet been recorded, the style track [A] will automatically be selected for recording when a melody track is selected. If you only want to record a melody track, be sure to turn the style track [A] off. 001 rEC To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while recording is in progress. 3 Recording will start when you play on the keyboard. NOTE You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The current measure will be shown on the display during recording. User 1 rEC 003 • If the memory becomes full during recording a warning message will appear and recording will stop automatically. Use the song clear or track clear (page 55) function to delete unwanted data and make more room available for recording, then do the recording again. Recording starts Current measure 4 Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC] button. or PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 53 Record Your Own Performance If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will light. ● To Record Other Tracks Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks. By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5], [A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display) while recording new tracks. ● To Re-record a Track Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal way. The new material will overwrite the previous data. 5 When the recording is done ... ◆ To Play Back a User Song User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 39). 1 Press the [SONG] button. 2 The current song number/name will be displayed—use the dial to select the user song (031–035) you want to play. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. ● Data Recording Limitations • The split voice cannot be recorded. • The following data are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes made during the song will not be recorded. reverb type, chorus type, time signature, style number, style volume, tempo 54 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Record Your Own Performance Song Clear—Deleting User Songs This function clears an entire user song (all tracks). 1 2 NOTE Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031– 035) you want to clear. • If you only want to clear a specific track from a user song use the Track Clear function. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second Press and hold 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the song. YES A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. NOTE • To execute the Song Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Song Clear operation. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the song is being cleared. Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song. 1 2 Press the [SONG] button, then select the user song (031– 035) you want to clear. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5], [A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. ClrTr1 YES Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the track. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. NOTE • To execute the Track Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Track Clear operation. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track is being cleared. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 55 Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below. ● The Backup Parameters • User Songs • Style file of style number 163* • Touch Response on/off • Registration Memory • FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type, Arpeggio Velocity * Refer to “Loading Style Files” on page 74 Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. ■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user setting, registration memory, user songs, style file of style number 163—turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. ■Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear song data and style files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys. 56 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual CAUTION • When you execute the Flash Clear operation, song data you have purchased will also be cleared. Be sure to save data you want to keep to a computer. Basic Operation and Displays Basic Operation Overall PSR-I425 control is based on the following simple operations. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. 3 Start a function. 3 Start a function. 2 Select an item or value. 1 Select a basic function. Display (page 59) GrandPno 001 001 ● Volume Adjustment Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones plugged into the PHONES jack. Rotate counterclockwise to decrease the volume. 1 Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. The “Press & Hold” Symbol The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a range of functions. Press a button to select a basic function. Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson. Select an auto-accompaniment style. Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 57 Basic Operation and Displays 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be displayed. You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item. ForElise 012 This portion of the display indicates the name and number of the currently selected song, voice and style. It also displays the name and current setting/ value of other functions. f ● CATEGORY [ Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial continuously to continuously increase or decrease the value. Increase ] and [ ] buttons When selecting a song, style, or voice, you can use these buttons to jump to the first item in the next or previous category. f Decrease r ● Dial r ■ Changing Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for selecting categorized items, as in the example below. ● [+] and [-] Buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increment the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrement the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increment or decrement the value in the corresponding direction. Jump to the first item in the next or previous category. Example: VOICE SELECT SweetFlt Press briefly to decrement. Press briefly to increment. 090 The first voice in the selected category is selected. ● Number Buttons [0]–[9] Example: Song number “003” can be entered in three ways. • [0] → [0] → [3] • [0] → [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) • [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) 3 Press number buttons [0], [0], [3]. r In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when you have to select from a large number of voices. f The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number or parameter value. Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below). In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual the dial is recommended for selection simply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+] and [-] buttons. Start a function. This is the [START/STOP] button. Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm). 58 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation and Displays Display Items The display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions. Notation Displays the melody and chord notes of a song when the Song Lesson function is in use, or the notes of chords you specify when the Dictionary function is in use. At other times the notes you play on the keyboard are displayed. BEAT number and MEASURE Indicates the beat number in a measure during the Metronome function. Indicates the current measure during playback of a song or style, and the currently set Tempo value for the song or style. (see page 27) 001 Chord Display NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va” in the notation. • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. TOUCH Indicates that Touch response is turned on. (see page 65) HARMONY Indicates that Harmony is turned on. (see page 60) Indicates the name of the chord currently being played back, or the name of the chord being played on the keyboard. Song Track Display Information related to the song tracks is shown here. (see page 52, 79) GrandPno 001 001 DUAL Indicates that the Dual voice is turned on. (see page 29) SPLIT Indicates that the Split voice is turned on. (see page 30) ARPEGGIO Beat Display Indicates the current style or song beat with flashing arrows. (see page 27) Indicates that the Arpeggio is turned on. (see page 14) Knob Assign Display Performance assistant technology Indicates that performance assistant technology is turned on. (see page 23) This display allows you to visually confirm parameters assigned to the knobs. (see page 18) ACMP ON Indicates that Accompaniment is turned on. (see page 34) SYNC STOP Indicates that SYNC STOP is turned on. (see page 71) PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 59 Reference e erenc ef R Adding Effects Harmony This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn Harmony feature on. To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button again. When harmony is on the harmony icon will appear in the display. 3 Use the dial to select a harmony type. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 119 for information about the available harmony types. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different-refer to the below section “How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the Effect Type List for details. When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main voice is automatically selected. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/ OFF] button for longer than a second so that the Harmony Type item appears. “HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected harmony type will be displayed. Use the dial to select a different harmony type. NOTE • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). HarmType Hold for longer than a second. Trio 02 The currently selected harmony type ● How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo) • Harmony type 01 to 05 Keep holding down the keys. Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 34). • Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo) • Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill) Keep holding down the keys. Hold down two keys. 60 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 69). Adding Effects Adding Reverb Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTON] button. 3 Use the dial to select a reverb type. You can check how the selected reverb type sounds by playing on the keyboard. StyleVol 100 r f 2 Hall3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Reverb Type item. “Reverb” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected reverb type will be displayed. 03 Selected reverb type Refer to the Effect Type List on page 119 for information about the available reverb types. ● Adjusting the Reverb Send Level You can individually adjust the amount of reverb that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. See page 83). Reverb Hall2 02 The currently selected reverb type PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 61 Adding Effects Adding Chorus The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison. When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTON] button. 3 Use the dial to select a chorus type. You can check how the selected chorus type sounds by playing on the keyboard. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Chorus Type item. “Chorus” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected chorus type will be displayed. Chorus2 2 Selected chorus type Refer to the Effect Type List on page 119 for information about the available chorus types. Chorus Chorus1 1 The currently selected chorus type 62 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual ● Adjusting the Chorus Send Level You can individually adjust the amount of chorus that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. See page 83). e erenc ef R Handy Performance Features The Metronome The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Use it to set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. ■Start the metronome ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again. ■Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo setting. Tempo GrandPno 001 090 1 Current Tempo setting 2 Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to 280. 1 Indicates the beat number in the measure PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 63 Handy Performance Features Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature. The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this example. NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. 3 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the beat length function “TimesigD”. The currently selected beat length will be displayed. f OFF] button for longer than a second to select the number of beats per measure function “TimesigN”. r 1 Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/ Hold for longer than a second. TimesigN 04 Number of beats per measure. TimesigD 2 Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure. A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”. 04 The length of one beat. 4 Use the dial to select the beat length. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example. Adjusting the Metronome Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTON] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required. f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Metronome Volume item. MtrVol 100 Metronome volume 64 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Tap Start You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected style/ song will begin playing at the tapped tempo. Touch Response Sensitivity When touch response is on you can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps. 1 Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to turn touch response on. The touch response icon will appear in the display when touch response is on (page 59). GrandPno 001 3 Use the dial in response to keyboard dynamics to select a touch sensitivity setting between 1 and 3. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—i.e. greater sensitivity. NOTE • The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”. Touch response icon 2 Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the Touch Sensitivity item appears. “TouchSns” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the currently selected touch sensitivity will be displayed. TouchSns Hold for longer than a second. Medium 2 Touch Sensitivity PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 65 Handy Performance Features Pitch Bend The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a voice such as the “040 Overdriven” guitar voice, you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending effects. Pitch Controls ◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose) The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. ◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning) The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 2 Use the CATEGORY [ Transpos 00 3 Use the dial to set the transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. 66 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Tuning item. f r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Transpose item. Tuning 000 3 Use the dial to set the tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. Handy Performance Features Controlling Arpeggio Volume with Keyboard Dynamics 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select “2 Thru”. When “1 Original” is selected the arpeggio volume is the same regardless of changes in keyboard velocity. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the arpeggio velocity function “ARP Velo”. “ARP Velo” will be shown in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected arpeggio velocity setting will appear. ARP Velo Original 1 The currently selected arpeggio velocity. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 67 Handy Performance Features One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select voice number “000” to activate this feature. 1 Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2 on page 28). 4 Use the dial to change songs, then play the keyboard and listen to the voice. SweetSpr 000 Use the dial to select voice number 000. 2 Select and play back any song (steps 1 to 3 on page 39). 3 Play the keyboard and remember the sound of the voice. If you have stopped playback at some point during this procedure press the [START/STOP] button to start playback again. 68 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual You should hear a different keyboard voice than you played in step 3. Press the [VOICE] button after changing songs to see the name of the voice being used. Handy Performance Features Adjusting the Harmony Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to set the harmony volume between 000 and 127. f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Harmony Volume item. HarmVol 080 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. MasterEQ Speakerl 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the master EQ type function “MasterEQ”. “MasterEQ” will be shown in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected EQ type will appear. 1 The currently selected master EQ type. 3 Use the dial to select the desired Master EQ setting. Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speakers. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 69 e erenc ef R Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 33 of the Quick Guide. Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment procedure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more. Pattern Variation (Sections) The PSR-I425 features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. Intro Main A/B Ending Auto fill ● INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ● MAIN section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. ● Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing to section A or B. ● ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. 1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a style. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn synchro start on. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. Beat arrows will flash when the synchro start standby mode is engaged Appears when Auto Accompaniment is on. 70 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual ● Synchro Start When the synchro start standby mode is engaged, style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button again. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. MAIN A ENDING The name of the selected section— MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed. 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A You’re now ready to play the intro. 6 As soon as you play a chord with your This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. ● Synchro Stop When this function is selected the accompaniment style will only play while you are playing chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Style playback will stop when you release the keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC STOP] button. left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords” on page 38. Split point Appears when the synchro-stop function is engaged. Accompaniment range 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. The style will play while you are playing the keys Style playback will stop when you release the keys FILL A≥B When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 71 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Adjusting the Style Volume 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Style Volume item. f Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function. 1 Press the [FUNCTON] button. StyleVol 100 3 Use the dial to set the style volume between 000 and 127. Setting the Split Point The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the procedure described below. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. 2 Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] for 3 Use the dial to set the split point to any key from 000 through 127. longer than a second so that the Split point item appears. Split point (54 : F#2) Main voice Split voice Hold for longer than a second SplitPnt NOTE • When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point also changes. • The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson. Split point 72 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual r NOTE • You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the item (page 82). f 054 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the instrument can be used (page 38). Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function, then press the [ACMP ON/ OFF] button to turn the auto accompaniment on. PopBossa 104 Appears when auto accompaniment is on Accompaniment range PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 73 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Loading Style Files This instrument features 162 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be loaded into style number 163 and used in the same way as the internal styles. In order to use the style file load function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to the instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 89 (“Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument”). The procedure described below loads a style file that has already been transferred from a computer to the instrument into style number 163. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Execute the load operation. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the style file load function “Sff Load”. Sff Load After about 2 seconds the name of a loadable style file will appear in the display. If multiple loadable style files have been transferred to the instrument, you can use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in sequence. 74 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual With the name of the style file you want to load shown in the display, press the number [0] button. 4 A confirmation message for the load operation will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually load the file. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Chord Basics Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”. The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad, for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale). 3rd 3rd Root In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and anchors the other chord notes. The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third. Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones) The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two additional chords, as shown below. Major chord CM Minor 3rd Minor chord Cm Major 3rd Augmented chord C aug Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Diminished chord C dim Minor 3rd Minor 3rd The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”). ● Reading Chord Names Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord (other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance. Cm Root note Chord type ● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the PSR-I425.) Suspended 4 th 7 th C sus4 Perfect 5 th Perfect 4 th Minor/major 7 th Flatted 7 th Minor chord Major chord Flatted 7 th C M7 Minor chord Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th (b5) (b5) C m7 C7 Flatted 5 th Major 7 th C m7 7 th, flatted 5 th C mM7 Major 7 th Minor 7 th C7 7 th chord Flatted 5 th Minor 7 th chord Major 7 th Major chord 7 th, suspended 4 th C 7sus4 Flatted 7 th Suspended 4 th chord PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 75 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions ■Recognized Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords. Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Major [M] 1-3-5 C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Display C (9) C(9) C6 (9) Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6 C6(9) * Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 C M7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C M7 Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 C M7 Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5 C (9) CM7 (9) * (#11) CM7(#11) * (b5) Cb5 * (b5) Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 C M7 CM7b5 * Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 C sus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 C aug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 C M7aug CM7aug * Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm(9) Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 C m6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 C m7 Cm7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm (9) (9) C m7 (11) Cm7(9) 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) C m7 Cm7(11) * Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 (9) C mM7 (b5) C m7 (b5) CmM7(9) * Cm7b5 CmM7b5 * Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 C mM7 C dim Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 C dim7 Cdim7 Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 Cdim (b9) C7(b9) (b13) C7(b13) (9) C7(9) (#11) C7(#11) (13) C7(13) (#9) C7 Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7 Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 C7(#9) Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C 7b5 C7b5 * Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C 7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C 7sus4 C7sus4 One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1-2-5 C 1+2+5 C* * These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function. NOTE • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), 1+2+5. 76 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the LESSON [START] button for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second Dict. 3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Notation of chord Chord name (root and type) Dict. 001 Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. Dict. 001 NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. 4 Try playing a chord in the auto accom- paniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flash. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 77 e erenc ef R Song Settings Song Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Song Volume item. SongVol 100 Song volume A-B Repeat You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A 2 Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec- ond time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). B 1 Play the song (page 39) and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). 3 The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. NOTE • The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure increments. • The current measure number is shown in the display during playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song. 78 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Song Settings Muting Independent Song Parts Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. Use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to mute or un-mute the corresponding tracks. The track number in the display disappears when that track is muted. Refer to page 52 for information about the song track configuration. Track number on—Track will playback Track number off—Track is muted or contains no data Change the Melody Voice You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer. NOTE • You cannot change the melody voice of a user song. 1 Select the song and play it. 2 Rotate the dial to select the voice you 3 Press the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, indicating that the voice selected in step #2 has replaced the song’s original melody voice. want to listen to after pressing the [VOICE] button. Strings 050 Hold for longer than a second SONG MEL PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 79 e erenc ef R Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved (8 banks of two setups each). 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Up to 16 presets (eight banks of two each) can be memorized. Saving to the Registration Memory 1 Set the panel controls as required— select a voice, accompaniment style, etc. 2 Press the [●] (MEMORY/BANK) button. 4 Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2] button while holding the [●] (MEMORY/ BANK) button to store the current panel settings to the specified registration memory. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. Writing! Bank 1 Bank number 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but- tons to select a bank number from 1 to 8. NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song playback. 80 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual NOTE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. CAUTION • Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registration memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings Recalling a Registration Memory 1 Press the [●] (MEMORY/BANK) button. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. ● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registration Memory • Style settings* Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo Bank 1 Bank number 2 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select bank you want to recall. • Voice settings Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance, Chorus Send Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level) • Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type • Arpeggio settings Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio ON/OFF • Harmony settings Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume • Other settings Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Assign * Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features. 3 Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1] or [2], containing the settings you want to recall. The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears in the display for a few seconds. The panel controls will be instantly set accordingly. REGIST 1 1 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 81 e erenc ef R The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tuning, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the function list starting on the opposite page. There are 54 function parameters in all. When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required. Selecting and Setting Functions 1 Find the function you want to set in the list that begins on page 83. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 4 Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the selected function as required. The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/ OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF. In some cases the [+] button will initiate execution of the selected function, and the [-] will cancel the selection. StyleVol 100 3 Select a function. r f Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary until the function’s display name appears in the display. Direct numeric entry. • Decrement value by 1. • OFF • Cancel Transpos • Increment value by 1. • ON • Execute Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. 00 The selected function. 82 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Some function settings are stored in memory as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on page 56 for information on the function settings that are stored on the instrument. To restore all initial factor default settings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure described in the “Initialization” section on page 56. The Functions ● Function Setting List Setting Item title Range/Settings Description Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style. Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song. Transpose Transpos -12–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Tuning Tuning -100–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments. Split Point SplitPnt 000–127 (C-2–G8) Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”— in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Touch Sensitivity TouchSns 1(Soft), 2(Medium), 3(Hard) When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the feature. Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice. Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice. Main Voice Pan M.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Main Voice Reverb Level M.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Main Voice Chorus Level M.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Main Voice Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 Sets the Main voice attack time. Main Voice Release Time M.Releas 000–127 Sets the Main voice release time. Main Voice Filter Cutoff M.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter cutoff frequency. Main Voice Filter Resonance M.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Main voice filter resonance. Dual Voice D.Voice 001–514 Selects the Dual voice. Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice. Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Dual Voice Pan D.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Dual Voice Reverb Level D.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Dual Voice Chorus Level D.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Dual Voice Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 Sets the Dual voice attack time. Dual Voice Release Time D.Releas 000–127 Sets the Dual voice release time. Dual Voice Filter Cutoff D.Cutoff 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter cutoff frequency. Dual Voice Filter Resonance D.Reso. 000–127 Sets the Dual voice filter resonance. Split Voice S.Voice 001–514 Selects the Split voice. Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice. Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice. Split Voice Pan S.Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Split Voice Reverb Level S.Reverb 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Split Voice Chorus Level S.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 83 The Functions Setting Item title Range/Settings Description Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list on page 119) Chorus Type Chorus 01–05 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list on page 119) Master EQ Type MasterEQ Speaker1, Speaker2, Headphone, Line Out1, Line Out2 Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 119) Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. Arpeggio Type ARP Type 01–62 Determines the Arpeggio type. (See the list on page 14) Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo 1 (Original), 2 (Thru) Sets the velocity mode for arpeggio playback. Style File Load Sff Load 001–nnn Loads a Style file. PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 88). Local On/Off Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 87) External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 87) Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out SongOut ON/OFF Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Song playback. Initial Send InitSend YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to send, or press [-] to cancel. Time Signature Numerator TimesigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator TimesigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note Sets the length of each metronome beat. Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Grade Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off. Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. * All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.) 84 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual e erenc ef R Connecting to a Computer Nearly all of the electronic musical instruments made today—particularly synthesizers, sequencers and computer music related devices—use MIDI. MIDI is a worldwide standard that allows these devices to send and receive performance and setting data. Naturally, this instrument lets you save or send your keyboard performance as MIDI data, as well as the songs, styles and panel settings. The potential MIDI holds for your live performances and music creation/production is enormous—simply by connecting this instrument to a computer and transmitting MIDI data. In this section, you’ll learn the basics of MIDI and the specific MIDI functions provided by this instrument. What Is MIDI? No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument”. In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? ● Acoustic guitar note production For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the instrument. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice”, “with which key”, “about how strong”, “when was it pressed”, and “when was it released”. Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampling note. Example of Keyboard Information Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. ● Digital instrument note production L Tone Generator Sampling (Electronic circuit) Sampling Note Note R Playing the keyboard Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? Voice number (with what voice) 1 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) Your keyboard performance and all panel operations of this instrument are processed as MIDI data. The songs, auto accompaniment (styles), and User songs are also made up of MIDI data. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface and it allows different musical instruments and devices to instantly communicate with each other, via digital data. The MIDI standard is used all over the world and was designed to transmit performance data between electronic musical instruments (or computers). Thanks to MIDI, you can control one instrument from another and transmit performance data between the devices-taking your creative and performance potential to even higher levels. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 85 Connecting to a Computer ● Channel Messages This instrument is capable of handling 16 MIDI channels simultaneously—meaning it can play up to sixteen different instruments at the same time. Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. Message Name ● System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device. Message Name Instrument Operation/Panel Setting Instrument Operation/Panel Setting Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus settings, etc. Note ON/OFF Performance data of the keyboard (contains note number and velocity data) Realtime Messages Start/stop operation Program Change Instrument selection (including bank select MSB/LSB, if necessary) Control Change Instrument settings (volume, pan, etc.) Connecting a Personal Computer The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer. ● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 87). ● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 89). The connection procedure is as follows: 1 Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com- puter. The USB–MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM. Installation of the USB MIDI driver is described on page 92. 2 Connect the USB terminal of the computer to the USB terminal on the instrument using a standard USB cable (USB cable sold separately). ■ USB Precautions Please observe the following precautions when connecting the instrument to a computer via a USB cable. Failure to do so can cause the instrument and/or the computer to hang up (freeze), possibly causing corruption or loss of data. If the instrument or computer does hang up, turn the power to both devices off and then on again, and restart the computer. CAUTION • Wake the computer from a sleep/suspended/standby mode before connecting the USB cable. The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft Downloader application that allows you to transfer song files from your computer to the instrument’s flash memory. For instructions about how to install Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song files, see page 90. • Connect the USB cable to the instrument and computer before turning power to the instrument on. • Check the following points before turning the instrument’s power on or off, and before plugging or unplugging the USB cable. • Quit all applications. • Make sure that no data transfer is in progress (data is transferred whenever you play on the keyboard or play a song). • Allow at least 6 seconds between turning the instrument’s power on and off, and between plugging and unplugging the USB cable. • Directly connect the instrument to the computer using a single USB cable. Do not use a USB hub. NOTE • The Musicsoft Downloader application may not be able to access the instrument in the following cases: PSR-I425 USB cable 86 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual • During style playback. • During song playback. Connecting to a Computer Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument. ● When the instrument is connected with computer, it transmits/receives performance data. USB terminal USB terminal PSR-I425 USB cable ■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception. Range/Settings Description Local ON/OFF Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. External Clock ON/OFF These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). Keyboard Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Song data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback. • If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely may be caused by Local Control being set to off. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the item you want to change its value. r CAUTION f Item CAUTION • If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will not start. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select ON or OFF. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 87 Connecting to a Computer ■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you want to transfer performance data between the computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item can conveniently make multiple settings for you in one operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and OFF. This setting is not necessary when transferring song or backup files between the computer and the instrument. * Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. PC1 PC2* OFF Local OFF OFF ON External Clock ON OFF OFF Song Out OFF OFF OFF Style Out OFF OFF OFF Keyboard Out OFF ON ON 1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second so that the PC Mode item appears. PC mode oFF 2 Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF. NOTE • When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo, song recording, and lesson features cannot be used. r f NOTE • You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate it (page 82). Remote Control of MIDI Devices You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the k eyboard. ■Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To use the remote control functions, simultaneously hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (C1 and C#1) and press the appropriate key (shown below). C#1 C1 C6: Fast forward B5: Start A5: Stop G5: Rewind F5: Top (move to the beginning of the song) E5: Metronome ON/OFF NOTE • Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2 mode. 88 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Connecting to a Computer Initial Send This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup data before the actual performance data. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Initial Send item. Transferring Data between the Computer and Instrument MIDI songs residing on a computer, as well as the 70 MIDI songs and 5 Style files provided on the CD-ROM, can be transferred to the instrument. Backup files can also be transferred from the instrument to the computer and back. Songs and styles transferred to the instrument can be used with the instrument’s lesson and other functions. In order to transfer songs between your computer and the instrument you will need to install the Musicsoft Downloader application and the USBMIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CDROM Installation Guide on page 92 for installation details. ● Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument. • Song Capacity (max.): Flash memory 99 songs (Song 036–) • Data Capacity: Flash memory 373 kb • Data Format: SMF format 0, style file (extension: .sty), Backup File (06PK61.BUP) ● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)? The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. ■With the Musicsoft Downloader You Can. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Transfer MIDI songs you have downloaded from the Internet or created on your computer from the computer to the instrument’s flash memory. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 90. The procedure for transferring songs included on the Accessory CD-ROM from your computer to the instrument is given as an example. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 89 Connecting to a Computer ● Backup files can be transferred from the instrument to a computer and back. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 91. q Click the CD-ROM drive Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. ■Use Musicsoft Downloader To Transfer Songs From the Accessory CD-ROM To the Instrument’s flash memory ● ● ● ● ● NOTE • If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding. 1 Install the Musicsoft Downloader and USB MIDI driver to your computer, then connect the computer and the instrument (page 94). w Double-click “SongData” Folder and e Click “Open” click a song file. 6 A copy of the selected MIDI song file will appear in the “List of files stored temporarily” at the top of the window. The memory medium will also be displayed at the bottom of the window to specify the destination for the transfer. Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash memory.” 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. 3 Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader shortcut icon that is created on the desktop. This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and the main window will appear. NOTE • The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader is running. 4 Click the “Add File” button and the Add File window will appear. 5 Click the button to the right of “Look in” and select the CD-ROM drive from the dropdown menu that appears. Double-click the “SongData” Folder on the window. Select the file you want to transfer to the instrument, and click “Open”. 90 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash Memory” 7 After selecting the file in the “List of files stored temporarily”, click the downward [Move] button and a confirmation message will appear. Click [OK] and the song will be transferred from the “List of files stored temporarily” to the instrument’s memory. Connecting to a Computer 8 Close the window to end the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the song transferred from your computer. 9 To playback a song stored in flash memory, press the [SONG] button. Use the dial to select the song you want to play, then press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. Style files (files with the “.STY” extension) can be transferred to Flash memory using the same procedure as described above. Style files transferred to the Flash Memory can be loaded into style number 163 and then played (page 74). ■Transfer a backup file from the instrument to a computer ● ● ● You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer “Backup Files” containing backup data (page 56), including the five User Songs stored on the instrument, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System Drive”, a file named “06PK61.BUP” will appear in the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the backup file. For details about how to transmit backup file using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help in the application. NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument. CAUTION • Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the memory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. CAUTION • Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer. • We recommend that you use a power adaptor rather than batteries when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the batteries fail during the transfer. CAUTION • The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmitted/ received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. CAUTION • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so, it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. ● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons... In order to use songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. r f 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song (036–) residing in flash memory for which you want to set the guide track. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the R-Part or L-Part item. 4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 91 e erenc ef R Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide SPECIAL NOTICES • • • • • • • This CD-ROM is copy-protected. Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to any problems while attempting to copy the CD-ROM or software and cannot be held responsible for the results of attempts to copy the data. The software and this owner’s manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation. Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of this manual before installing the application.) Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer. Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software. This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.). Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer. Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately. The screen displays as illustrated in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer. Important Notices about the CD-ROM ● Data Types This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 94 for software installation instructions. CAUTION • Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on an audio CD player. The result high-volume noise can potentially cause hearing damage or damage your CD player and speakers. ● Operating System (OS) The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems. 92 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide CD-ROM Contents q e r Folder Name Application / Data Name w Contents Musicsoft Downloader This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory. DMN_FlashDemo Flash Demo Digital Music Notebook is an educational content that lets you enjoy music while learning. Full motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital Music Notebook. DMN_DemoSong Demo Song You can experience Digital Music Notebook functions with the demo song. You need to download and install Digital Music Notebook on your computer prior to using the demo song. Song Book Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs 1–11, and song 20 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual beginning on page 100. q MSD_ w e SongBook USB-MIDI Driver (Windows 98/Me) r This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer via USB. USBdrv2k USB-MIDI Driver (Windows 2000/XP) SongData MIDI 70 songs These songs can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the instrument’s functions. StyleData 5 style files These styles can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the instrument’s functions. In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer. You can download the Adobe Reader. Please check the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/ You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft Downloader, Digital Music Notebook and USB-MIDI Driver at the following website. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ ■Using the CD-ROM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Please read the Software License Agreement on page 98 before opening the CD-ROM package. 1 Check the system requirements to make sure that the software will run on your computer. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The start window should appear automatically. 3 Install the USB MIDI driver to the com- puter. Refer to “Installing the USB-MIDI Driver” on page 94 for installation and setup instructions. 4 Connect the instrument to the com- puter. The connection procedure is described on page 86. 5 Install the software. Musicsoft Downloader: See page 96. 6 Launch the software. For further software operation refer to the online help supplied with the software. Refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 97 when you have trouble with installing the driver. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 93 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide System Requirements Application/Data OS CPU Memory Hard Disk Display Musicsoft Downloader Windows 98SE/Me/2000/ XP Home Edition/ XP Professional 233 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® processor family 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) at least 128 MB of free space (at least 512 MB of free space is recommended) 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit) USB Driver for Windows 98/Me Windows 98/Me Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional 32 MB or more (64 MB or more is recommended) at least 2 MB of free space — USB Driver for Windows 2000/XP 166 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® processor family 400MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family (1GHz or more is recommended) 128 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) 1GHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family (1.4GHz or more is recommended) 256 MB or more Digital Music Notebook Digital Music Notebook (Requirements for playing content with video included.) Windows® XP Professional Edition, SP1a more Windows® XP Home Edition, SP1a more Windows 2000 Professional, SP4 more at least 50 MB of free space 1024 x 768 HighColor (16-bit) You can confirm the latest system requirements at the following website. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ Software Installation ● Uninstall (Removing the Software) Installed software can be removed from your computer as follows: From the Windows Start menu select Start → Settings → Control panel → Add or Remove Applications → Install and Uninstall. Select the item you want to remove and click [Add or Remove]. Follow the on-screen instructions to remove the selected software. NOTE • The actual names of the menu items and buttons will depend on the OS version you are using. ■ Installing the USB-MIDI Driver● ● ● ● In order to be able to communicate with and use MIDI devices connected to your computer, the appropriate driver software must be properly installed on your computer. The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software and similar applications on your computer to transmit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI devices via a USB cable. Computer Sequence software USB Cable MIDI device Driver • Windows 98/Me installation ➔ page 95. • Windows 2000 installation ➔ page 95. • Windows XP installation ➔ page 96. Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you will be using (D:, E:, Q: etc.) The drive name is displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My Computer” folder. The root directory of the CDROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively. 94 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide Installing the driver on Windows 98/Me Installing the driver on Windows 2000 1 Start the computer. 2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD- 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis- ROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. 3 First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the USB terminal of the computer to the USB connector of the instrument. When the instrument is turned on, the computer automatically displays the “Add New Hardware Wizard. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. For Windows Me users, check the radio button to the left of “Automatic search for a better driver (Recommended)” and click [Next]. The system automatically starts searching and installing the driver. Proceed to Step 8. If the system does not detect the driver, select “Specify the location of the driver (Advanced)” and specify the CD-ROM drive’s root directory to install the driver and click [Next]. Execute the installation by following the onscreen instructions and proceed to Step 8. NOTE • If you are using Windows Me, skip Step 4–7. 4 Click [Next]. The window enables you to select the search method. 5 Check the radio button to the left of “Search for the best driver for your device. (Recommended)”. Click [Next]. The window enables you to select a location in which to install the driver. 6 Check the “Specify a location” box, click “Browse..”, then specify the root directory of the CD-ROM drive and continue the installation. (The CD-ROM drive letter may vary depending on your computer’s configuration. 7 When the system detects the driver on the CD-ROM and is ready for installation, a message is shown on the screen. Make sure that the “YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver” is listed, and click [Next]. The system starts the installation. 8 When installation is complete, a message trator” account to log into Windows. 2 Select [My Computer] ➔ [Control Panel] ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing] ➔ [File Signature Verification], and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore—Install all files, regardless of file signature” and click [OK]. 3 Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. 4 First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system automatically launches the Found New Hardware Wizard. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. Click [Next]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) 5 Select the radio button for “Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]”, then click [Next]. NOTE • If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature”, click [Yes]. 6 Check the “CD-ROM drives” check box, deselect all other check boxes, then click [Next]. NOTE • If the system prompts you to insert the Windows CD-ROM during detection of the drivers, point to the “USBdrv2k_” folder (e.g., D:\USBdrv2k_) and continue the installation. 7 Deselect the “Install one of the other drivers”, then click [Next]. 8 When the installation is complete, the Wizard displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard”. Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) 9 Restart the computer. The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. indicating so appears. Click [Finish]. The driver has been installed. NOTE • Some computers may take about ten seconds to show this screen after the installation is complete. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 95 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide Installing the driver on Windows XP 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis2 3 4 5 6 7 trator” account to log into Windows. Select [Start] ➔ [Control Panel]. If the control panel appears as “Pick a category”, click “Switch to Classic View” in the upper left of the window. All control panels and icons will be displayed. Go to [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing Options] and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK]. Click the [OK] button to close System Properties, and then click “X” in the upper right of the window to close the Control Panel. Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system launches the Found New Hardware Wizard automatically. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until Wizard window is displayed. (Some computers may take a while to display the window.) If the Wizard window prompts you to specify whether or not to connect to Windows Update, select the radio button for “No, not this time”, then click [Next]. Select the radio button for “Install the software automatically (recommended)”, then click [Next]. NOTE • If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP”, click [Continue Anyway]. 8 When the installation is complete, the Wizard displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard”. Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) 9 Restart the computer. If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until the Wizard window is displayed. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. 96 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual ■Installing the Musicsoft Downloader and Digital Music Notebook Applications ● ● ● IMPORTANT • You will need to log in with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows 2000 or XP. • You will need to log in with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Digital Music Notebook on a computer running Windows 2000 or XP. IMPORTANT • When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Internet Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer. IMPORTANT • Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Notebook content. Credit card processing may not be possible for some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make sure that your credit card can be used. NOTE • Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully agrees to when using the application. Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at the end of this manual before using the application. 1 Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start window will appear automatically showing software applications. NOTE • If the start window does not appear automatically, double click your “My Computer” folder to open it. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Double click “Start.exe” and proceed to step 2, below. 2 Click [Musicsoft Downloader] or [Digital Music Notebook]. 3 Click the [install] button for Musicsoft downloader, or [Digital Music Notebook Download] button for Digital Music Notebook, and follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. For Digital Music Notebook operating instructions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music Notebook application and click “Help”. For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and click “Help”. * You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft Downloader at the following website. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ IMPORTANT • Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files between this instrument and a computer. No other file transfer application can be used. Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide ■Troubleshooting The driver cannot be installed. • Is the USB cable connected correctly? Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the USB cable, then connect it again. • Is the USB function enabled on your computer? When you connect the instrument to the computer for the first time, if the “Add New Hardware Wizard” does not appear, the USB function on the computer may be disabled. Perform the following steps. 1 Select [Control Panel] ➔ [System] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 98/Me), or select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP). When controlling the instrument from your computer via USB, the instrument does not operate correctly or no sound is heard. • Did you install the driver? (page 94) • Is the USB cable connected correctly? • Are the volume settings of the instrument, playback device, and application program set to the appropriate levels? • Have you selected an appropriate port in the sequence software? • Are you using the latest USB MIDI driver? The latest driver can be downloaded from the following web site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear at “Universal serial bus controller” or “USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x” mark, the USB controller is disabled. • Is any unknown device registered? If driver installation fails, the instrument will be marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will not be able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown device” by following the steps below. 1 Select [Control Panel] ➔ [System] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 98/Me), or select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View devices by type”. 3 If you find “Other devices”, double-click it to extend the tree to look for “Unknown device”. If one appears, select it and click the [Remove] button. 4 Remove the USB cable from the instrument, and make the connection again. 5 Install the driver again. • Windows 98/Me users...... see page 95 • Windows 2000 users........ see page 95 • Windows XP users........... see page 96 Playback response is delayed. • Does your computer satisfy the system requirements? • Is any other application or device driver running? Cannot suspend or resume the computer correctly. • Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI application is running. If you are using Windows 2000, you may not be able to suspend/resume normally, depending on the particular environment (USB Host Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the instrument functions again. How can I delete or re-install the driver? [Windows Me/98] 1 When the instrument is recognized correctly, double-click “System” in the Control Panel to open the System window. 2 Double-click the “Device Manager” tab, select “YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver” and delete it. 3 Use the MS-DOS prompt or Explorer to delete the following three files. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 97 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide NOTE • To delete these files using Explorer, select “Folder Options” from the Tool (View) menu, and select “Show all files” (and folders). • \WINDOWS\INF\OTHER\1037.INF • \WINDOWS\SYSTEM\Xgusb.drv • \WINDOWS\SYSTEM\Ymidusb.sys 4 5 6 Disconnect the USB cable. Restart the computer. Re-install the driver. 4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”). BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s) and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copyrights. • You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer. • You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy of the SOFTWARE. • You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement. 2. RESTRICTIONS • You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method whatsoever. • You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE. • You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers. • You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that violates public policy. • You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without permission by Yamaha Corporation Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you must observe. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public without permission of the copyright owner. • The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission of the copyright owner. 3. TERMINATION This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written documents and all copies thereof. 98 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE. 7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof. • Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including, without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. 8. GENERAL This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or procedure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. 9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully authorized representative of Yamaha. Appendix Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 87.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. • • • • When using the Dictionary function (page 77), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The volume is too soft. The sound quality is poor. The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new ones, or use the optional AC adaptor. The style or song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock” on page 87. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 83) is set to an appropriate level. The style does not sound properly. Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 72). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/ STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number 138 or a style between 150 and 162 (Pianist). This is not a malfunction. Style number 138 and style numbers 150–162 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. Some notes don’t sound when playing multiple notes simultaneously on the keyboard, or some notes don’t sound when playing arpeggios. You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony (the maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously) of the instrument. The instrument will play normally as long as no more than 32 notes are being played at once, both on the keyboard and by any automatic playback functions. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played. Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off. The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-related function. There is no harmony sound. The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types 01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range. Types 06–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 06 = 12 you need to play two notes at the same time. PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 99 Scores This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece. Song No. 9 q =123 (Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger) Hallelujah Chorus 100 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Scores PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 101 Scores This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 10 q =61 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Ave Maria P.A.T. Type =CHORD Your Turn. Repeatedly Play the Same Key. 102 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Scores PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 103 Scores This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 11 q =108 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Nocturne op.9-2 P.A.T. Type =CHORD You Can Even Play the Same Keys! 104 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Scores PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 105 Let’s play the Tabla ■ Instruction Flow: Set the Voice number to 129 (Teen Tal C). Set the Split Voice number to 145 (Harmonium 2). Set the split point to 83. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. Now play the Tabla. Set the octave range for the Split Voice to 0. 6 Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] but- 2 Use the dial or the number buttons to select 129 (Teen Tal C). 3 Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] but- 7 Use the dial or the number buttons to select the Split Voice number 145 (Harmonium 2). 8 Press the CATEGORY [ ] button twice and “S.Octave” will appear in the display. f ton for longer than a second and “SplitPnt” will appear in the display. ton for longer than a second and “S.Voice” will appear in the display. 4 Use the dial or the number buttons to change the split point to 83. 5 Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button and split voice icon will appear in the display. 9 Press the number [0] button to set the octave 0. 10 Play the keyboard. Split point Harmonium 2 Play the Keyboards. Teen Tal C Hold the Keyboards. ● Changing the Tabla type You can change the Tabla type by selecting the Arpeggio type (51–62). Press and hold the [ARPEGGIO ON/OFF] button for longer than a second and select the arpeggio type (51–62). 106 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Voice List ■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take this into consideration. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. ● Panel Voice List Bank Select Voice No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 000 112 001 Grand Piano 000 112 002 Bright Piano 000 112 007 Harpsichord 000 112 004 Honky-tonk Piano 000 112 003 MIDI Grand Piano 000 113 003 CP 80 E.PIANO 000 114 005 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 000 113 006 Hyper Tines 000 112 005 Funky Electric Piano 000 112 006 DX Modern Electric Piano 000 114 006 Venus Electric Piano 000 112 008 Clavi ORGAN 000 118 019 Cool! Organ 000 117 019 Cool! Rotor Organ 000 112 017 Jazz Organ 1 000 113 017 Jazz Organ 2 000 112 019 Rock Organ 000 114 019 Purple Organ 000 112 018 Click Organ 000 116 017 Bright Organ 000 127 019 Theater Organ 000 121 020 16'+2' Organ 000 120 020 16'+4' Organ 000 113 020 Chapel Organ 000 112 020 Church Organ 000 112 021 Reed Organ ACCORDION 000 112 022 Musette Accordion 000 113 022 Traditional Accordion 000 113 024 Bandoneon 000 113 023 Modern Harp 000 112 023 Harmonica GUITAR 000 112 025 Classical Guitar 000 112 026 Folk Guitar 000 112 027 Jazz Guitar 000 117 028 60’s Clean Guitar 000 113 026 12Strings Guitar 000 112 028 Clean Guitar 000 113 027 Octave Guitar 000 112 029 Muted Guitar 000 112 030 Overdriven Guitar 000 112 031 Distortion Guitar BASS 000 112 034 Finger Bass 000 112 033 Acoustic Bass 000 112 035 Pick Bass 000 112 036 Fretless Bass 000 112 037 Slap Bass 000 112 039 Synth Bass 000 113 039 Hi-Q Bass 000 113 040 Dance Bass Bank Select Voice No. 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) STRINGS 000 112 049 String Ensemble 000 112 050 Chamber Strings 000 113 050 Slow Strings 000 112 045 Tremolo Strings 000 112 051 Synth Strings 000 112 046 Pizzicato Strings 000 112 041 Violin 000 112 043 Cello 000 112 044 Contrabass 000 112 047 Harp 000 112 106 Banjo 000 112 056 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 000 112 053 Choir 000 113 053 Vocal Ensemble 000 112 055 Air Choir 000 112 054 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 000 117 067 Sweet! Tenor Sax 000 113 065 Sweet! Soprano Sax 000 112 067 Tenor Sax 000 112 066 Alto Sax 000 112 065 Soprano Sax 000 112 068 Baritone Sax 000 114 067 Breathy Tenor Sax 000 112 072 Clarinet 000 112 069 Oboe 000 112 070 English Horn 000 112 071 Bassoon TRUMPET 000 115 057 Sweet! Trumpet 000 112 057 Trumpet 000 112 058 Trombone 000 113 058 Trombone Section 000 112 060 Muted Trumpet 000 112 061 French Horn 000 112 059 Tuba BRASS 000 112 062 Brass Section 000 113 062 Big Band Brass 000 113 063 80’s Brass 000 119 062 Mellow Horns 000 114 063 Techno Brass 000 112 063 Synth Brass FLUTE 000 114 074 Sweet! Flute 000 113 076 Sweet! Pan Flute 000 112 074 Flute 000 112 073 Piccolo 000 112 076 Pan Flute 000 112 075 Recorder 000 112 080 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 000 112 081 Square Lead 000 112 082 Sawtooth Lead PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 107 Voice List Voice No. 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 115 082 Analogon 000 119 082 Fargo 000 112 099 Star Dust 000 112 086 Voice Lead 000 112 101 Brightness SYNTH PAD 000 112 092 Xenon Pad 000 112 095 Equinox 000 112 089 Fantasia 000 113 090 Dark Moon 000 113 101 Bell Pad PERCUSSION 000 112 012 Vibraphone 000 112 013 Marimba 000 112 014 Xylophone 000 112 115 Steel Drums 000 112 009 Celesta 000 112 011 Music Box 000 112 015 Tubular Bells 000 112 048 Timpani DRUM KITS 127 000 001 Standard Kit 1 127 000 002 Standard Kit 2 127 000 009 Room Kit 127 000 017 Rock Kit 127 000 025 Electronic Kit 127 000 026 Analog Kit 127 000 113 Dance Kit 127 000 033 Jazz Kit 127 000 041 Brush Kit 127 000 049 Symphony Kit 126 000 001 SFX Kit 1 126 000 002 SFX Kit 2 ARPEGGIO 126 000 116 Teen Tal C 126 000 116 Teen Tal F 126 000 116 Teen Tal A 126 000 116 Dadra D 126 000 116 Dadra E 126 000 116 Dadra G 000 112 081 Synth Sequence 000 096 082 Chord Sequence 000 000 081 Square Pulse 000 113 063 Trance 000 114 063 Synth Echo 000 112 001 Piano Arpeggio 000 117 028 Guitar Chord 000 112 025 Guitar Arpeggio 127 000 002 Massive Percussion INDIAN 000 113 021 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed) 000 114 021 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed) 000 115 021 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed) 000 117 074 Bansuri 000 112 105 Sitar 1 000 113 105 Sitar 2 000 115 105 Sarod 000 114 105 Tanpura 126 000 116 Tabla Kit 126 000 115 Indian Kit ● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List Bank Select Voice No. 154 155 156 157 158 159 108 MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 000 000 001 Grand Piano 000 001 001 Grand Piano KSP 000 040 001 Piano Strings 000 041 001 Dream 000 000 002 Bright Piano 000 001 002 Bright Piano KSP PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 *170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 000 003 Electric Grand Piano 000 001 003 Electric Grand Piano KSP 000 032 003 Detuned CP80 000 000 004 Honky-tonk Piano 000 001 004 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 000 000 005 Electric Piano 1 000 001 005 Electric Piano 1 KSP 000 032 005 Chorus Electric Piano 1 000 000 006 Electric Piano 2 000 001 006 Electric Piano 2 KSP 000 032 006 Chorus Electric Piano 2 000 041 006 DX + Analog Electric Piano 000 000 007 Harpsichord 000 001 007 Harpsichord KSP 000 035 007 Harpsichord 2 000 000 008 Clavi 000 001 008 Clavi KSP CHROMATIC 000 000 009 Celesta 000 000 010 Glockenspiel 000 000 011 Music Box 000 064 011 Orgel 000 000 012 Vibraphone 000 001 012 Vibraphone KSP 000 000 013 Marimba 000 001 013 Marimba KSP 000 064 013 Sine Marimba 000 097 013 Balimba 000 098 013 Log Drums 000 000 014 Xylophone 000 000 015 Tubular Bells 000 096 015 Church Bells 000 097 015 Carillon 000 000 016 Dulcimer 000 035 016 Dulcimer 2 000 096 016 Cimbalom 000 097 016 Santur ORGAN 000 000 017 Drawbar Organ 000 032 017 Detuned Drawbar Organ 000 033 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 1 000 034 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 2 000 035 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 1 000 037 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 3 000 040 017 16+2'2/3 000 064 017 Organ Bass 000 065 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 2 000 066 017 Cheezy Organ 000 067 017 Drawbar Organ 2 000 000 018 Percussive Organ 000 024 018 70’s Percussive Organ 000 032 018 Detuned Percussive Organ 000 033 018 Light Organ 000 037 018 Percussive Organ 2 000 000 019 Rock Organ 000 064 019 Rotary Organ 000 065 019 Slow Rotary 000 066 019 Fast Rotary 000 000 020 Church Organ 000 032 020 Church Organ 3 000 035 020 Church Organ 2 000 040 020 Notre Dame 000 064 020 Organ Flute 000 065 020 Tremolo Organ Flute 000 000 021 Reed Organ 000 040 021 Puff Organ 000 000 022 Accordion 000 000 023 Harmonica 000 032 023 Harmonica 2 000 000 024 Tango Accordion 000 064 024 Tango Accordion 2 GUITAR 000 000 025 Nylon Guitar 000 043 025 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 000 096 025 Ukulele Voice List Voice No. 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 *279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 000 026 Steel Guitar 000 035 026 12-string Guitar 000 040 026 Nylon & Steel Guitar 000 041 026 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 000 096 026 Mandolin 000 000 027 Jazz Guitar 000 032 027 Jazz Amp 000 000 028 Clean Guitar 000 032 028 Chorus Guitar 000 000 029 Muted Guitar 000 040 029 Funk Guitar 000 041 029 Muted Steel Guitar 000 045 029 Jazz Man 000 000 030 Overdriven Guitar 000 043 030 Guitar Pinch 000 000 031 Distortion Guitar 000 040 031 Feedback Guitar 000 041 031 Feedback Guitar 2 000 000 032 Guitar Harmonics 000 065 032 Guitar Feedback 000 066 032 Guitar Harmonics 2 BASS 000 000 033 Acoustic Bass 000 040 033 Jazz Rhythm 000 045 033 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 000 000 034 Finger Bass 000 018 034 Finger Dark 000 040 034 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 000 043 034 Finger Slap Bass 000 045 034 Finger Bass 2 000 065 034 Modulated Bass 000 000 035 Pick Bass 000 028 035 Muted Pick Bass 000 000 036 Fretless Bass 000 032 036 Fretless Bass 2 000 033 036 Fretless Bass 3 000 034 036 Fretless Bass 4 000 000 037 Slap Bass 1 000 032 037 Punch Thumb Bass 000 000 038 Slap Bass 2 000 043 038 Velocity Switch Slap 000 000 039 Synth Bass 1 000 040 039 Techno Synth Bass 000 000 040 Synth Bass 2 000 006 040 Mellow Synth Bass 000 012 040 Sequenced Bass 000 018 040 Click Synth Bass 000 019 040 Synth Bass 2 Dark 000 040 040 Modular Synth Bass 000 041 040 DX Bass STRINGS 000 000 041 Violin 000 008 041 Slow Violin 000 000 042 Viola 000 000 043 Cello 000 000 044 Contrabass 000 000 045 Tremolo Strings 000 008 045 Slow Tremolo Strings 000 040 045 Suspense Strings 000 000 046 Pizzicato Strings 000 000 047 Orchestral Harp 000 040 047 Yang Chin 000 000 048 Timpani ENSEMBLE 000 000 049 Strings 1 000 003 049 Stereo Strings 000 008 049 Slow Strings 000 035 049 60’s Strings 000 040 049 Orchestra 000 041 049 Orchestra 2 000 042 049 Tremolo Orchestra 000 045 049 Velocity Strings 000 000 050 Strings 2 000 003 050 Stereo Slow Strings 000 008 050 Legato Strings Voice No. 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 040 050 Warm Strings 000 041 050 Kingdom 000 000 051 Synth Strings 1 000 000 052 Synth Strings 2 000 000 053 Choir Aahs 000 003 053 Stereo Choir 000 032 053 Mellow Choir 000 040 053 Choir Strings 000 000 054 Voice Oohs 000 000 055 Synth Voice 000 040 055 Synth Voice 2 000 041 055 Choral 000 064 055 Analog Voice 000 000 056 Orchestra Hit 000 035 056 Orchestra Hit 2 000 064 056 Impact BRASS 000 000 057 Trumpet 000 032 057 Warm Trumpet 000 000 058 Trombone 000 018 058 Trombone 2 000 000 059 Tuba 000 000 060 Muted Trumpet 000 000 061 French Horn 000 006 061 French Horn Solo 000 032 061 French Horn 2 000 037 061 Horn Orchestra 000 000 062 Brass Section 000 035 062 Trumpet & Trombone Section 000 000 063 Synth Brass 1 000 020 063 Resonant Synth Brass 000 000 064 Synth Brass 2 000 018 064 Soft Brass 000 041 064 Choir Brass REED 000 000 065 Soprano Sax 000 000 066 Alto Sax 000 040 066 Sax Section 000 000 067 Tenor Sax 000 040 067 Breathy Tenor Sax 000 000 068 Baritone Sax 000 000 069 Oboe 000 000 070 English Horn 000 000 071 Bassoon 000 000 072 Clarinet PIPE 000 000 073 Piccolo 000 000 074 Flute 000 000 075 Recorder 000 000 076 Pan Flute 000 000 077 Blown Bottle 000 000 078 Shakuhachi 000 000 079 Whistle 000 000 080 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 000 000 081 Square Lead 000 006 081 Square Lead 2 000 008 081 LM Square 000 018 081 Hollow 000 019 081 Shroud 000 064 081 Mellow 000 065 081 Solo Sine 000 066 081 Sine Lead 000 000 082 Sawtooth Lead 000 006 082 Sawtooth Lead 2 000 008 082 Thick Sawtooth 000 018 082 Dynamic Sawtooth 000 019 082 Digital Sawtooth 000 020 082 Big Lead 000 096 082 Sequenced Analog 000 000 083 Calliope Lead 000 065 083 Pure Lead 000 000 084 Chiff Lead 000 000 085 Charang Lead 000 064 085 Distorted Lead PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 109 Voice List Voice No. 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 110 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 000 086 Voice Lead 000 000 087 Fifths Lead 000 035 087 Big Five 000 000 088 Bass & Lead 000 016 088 Big & Low 000 064 088 Fat & Perky 000 065 088 Soft Whirl SYNTH PAD 000 000 089 New Age Pad 000 064 089 Fantasy 000 000 090 Warm Pad 000 000 091 Poly Synth Pad 000 000 092 Choir Pad 000 066 092 Itopia 000 000 093 Bowed Pad 000 000 094 Metallic Pad 000 000 095 Halo Pad 000 000 096 Sweep Pad SYNTH EFFECTS 000 000 097 Rain 000 065 097 African Wind 000 066 097 Carib 000 000 098 Sound Track 000 027 098 Prologue 000 000 099 Crystal 000 012 099 Synth Drum Comp 000 014 099 Popcorn 000 018 099 Tiny Bells 000 035 099 Round Glockenspiel 000 040 099 Glockenspiel Chimes 000 041 099 Clear Bells 000 042 099 Chorus Bells 000 065 099 Soft Crystal 000 070 099 Air Bells 000 071 099 Bell Harp 000 072 099 Gamelimba 000 000 100 Atmosphere 000 018 100 Warm Atmosphere 000 019 100 Hollow Release 000 040 100 Nylon Electric Piano 000 064 100 Nylon Harp 000 065 100 Harp Vox 000 066 100 Atmosphere Pad 000 000 101 Brightness 000 000 102 Goblins 000 064 102 Goblins Synth 000 065 102 Creeper 000 067 102 Ritual 000 068 102 To Heaven 000 070 102 Night 000 071 102 Glisten 000 096 102 Bell Choir 000 000 103 Echoes 000 000 104 Sci-Fi WORLD 000 000 105 Sitar 000 032 105 Detuned Sitar 000 035 105 Sitar 2 000 097 105 Tamboura 000 000 106 Banjo 000 028 106 Muted Banjo 000 096 106 Rabab 000 097 106 Gopichant 000 098 106 Oud 000 000 107 Shamisen 000 000 108 Koto 000 096 108 Taisho-kin 000 097 108 Kanoon 000 000 109 Kalimba 000 000 110 Bagpipe 000 000 111 Fiddle 000 000 112 Shanai PERCUSSIVE 000 000 113 Tinkle Bell PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 096 113 Bonang 000 097 113 Altair 000 098 113 Gamelan Gongs 000 099 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 000 100 113 Rama Cymbal 000 000 114 Agogo 000 000 115 Steel Drums 000 097 115 Glass Percussion 000 098 115 Thai Bells 000 000 116 Woodblock 000 096 116 Castanets 000 000 117 Taiko Drum 000 096 117 Gran Cassa 000 000 118 Melodic Tom 000 064 118 Melodic Tom 2 000 065 118 Real Tom 000 066 118 Rock Tom 000 000 119 Synth Drum 000 064 119 Analog Tom 000 065 119 Electronic Percussion 000 000 120 Reverse Cymbal SOUND EFFECTS 000 000 121 Fret Noise 000 000 122 Breath Noise 000 000 123 Seashore 000 000 124 Bird Tweet 000 000 125 Telephone Ring 000 000 126 Helicopter 000 000 127 Applause 000 000 128 Gunshot 064 000 001 Cutting Noise 064 000 002 Cutting Noise 2 064 000 004 String Slap 064 000 017 Flute Key Click 064 000 033 Shower 064 000 034 Thunder 064 000 035 Wind 064 000 036 Stream 064 000 037 Bubble 064 000 038 Feed 064 000 049 Dog 064 000 050 Horse 064 000 051 Bird Tweet 2 064 000 056 Maou 064 000 065 Phone Call 064 000 066 Door Squeak 064 000 067 Door Slam 064 000 068 Scratch Cut 064 000 069 Scratch Split 064 000 070 Wind Chime 064 000 071 Telephone Ring 2 064 000 081 Car Engine Ignition 064 000 082 Car Tires Squeal 064 000 083 Car Passing 064 000 084 Car Crash 064 000 085 Siren 064 000 086 Train 064 000 087 Jet Plane 064 000 088 Starship 064 000 089 Burst 064 000 090 Roller Coaster 064 000 091 Submarine 064 000 097 Laugh 064 000 098 Scream 064 000 099 Punch 064 000 100 Heartbeat 064 000 101 Footsteps 064 000 113 Machine Gun 064 000 114 Laser Gun 064 000 115 Explosion 064 000 116 Firework The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice. Drum Kit List • “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “117: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/ Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off Group 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 117 127/000/001 118 127/000/002 119 127/000/009 120 127/000/017 121 127/000/025 122 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll 2 Snare Noisy Snare Soft 2 Open Rim Shot H Short Kick Tight Short Kick Short Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Snare Snappy Electro Snare Noisy 4 Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2 Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog Short Kick Analog Side Stick Analog Snare Analog Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Tom Room 1 Snare Rock Rim Tom Rock 1 Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 111 Drum Kit List Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 A#5 C6 112 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off Group 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 2 2 117 127/000/001 123 127/000/113 124 127/000/033 125 127/000/041 126 127/000/049 127 126/000/001 128 126/000/002 Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Analog Snare Clap Snare Dry Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog3 Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog 2 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Kick Soft 2 Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Kick Jazz Kick Small Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Jazz M Tom Jazz 1 Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5 Hand Cymbal Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6 Hand Cymbal Short Tom Jazz 6 Cutting Noise Phone Call Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Door Slam String Slap Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Hand Cymbal 2 Train Jet Plane Hand Cymbal 2 Short Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 Maou Drum Kit List Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 152 126/000/116 Tabla Kit (Panel) A Tabla na A Tabla tin A Tabla Center tin A Tabla ti 01 A Tabla ti 02 A Tabla ri A Tabla kat A Tabla tu Open Baya Mid Baya Press Baya Bend Baya Slow Bend Baya Fast Click Open Click G Low Tabla Tharang G# Low Tabla Tharang A Low Tabla Tarang A# Low Tabla Tarang B Low Tabla Tarang C Low Tabla Tarang C# Low Tabla Tarang D Low Tabla Tarang D# Low Tabla Tarang E Low Tabla Tarang F Low Tabla Tarang F# Low Tabla Tarang G Low Tabla Tarang G# Low Tabla Tarang A Low Tabla Tarang A# Low Tabla Tarang B Low Tabla Tarang C Tabla na C Tabla tin C Tabla Center tin C Tabla ti 01 C Tabla ti 02 C Tabla ri C Tabla kat C Tabla tu D Tabla na D Tabla tin D Tabla Center tin D Tabla ti 01 D Tabla ti 02 D Tabla ri D Tabla kat D Tabla tu E Tabla na E Tabla tin E Tabla Center tin E Tabla ti 01 E Tabla ti 02 E Tabla ri E Tabla kat E Tabla tu F Tabla na F Tabla tin F Tabla Center tin F Tabla ti 01 F Tabla ti 02 F Tabla ri F Tabla kat F Tabla tu G Tabla na G Tabla tin G Tabla Center tin G Tabla ti 01 G Tabla ti 02 G Tabla ri G Tabla kat G Tabla tu 153 126/000/115 Alternate Group 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Indian Kit (Panel) Hand Clap Dafli Open Dafli Slap Dafli Rim Duff Open Duff Slap Duff Rim Hatheli Long Hatheli Short Baya ge Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ka Tabla na Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Dhol 1 Open Dhol 1 Slap Dhol 1 Mute Dhol 1 Open Slap Dhol 1 Roll Dandia Short Dandia Long Chutki Chipri Khanjira Open Khanjira Slap Khanjira Mute Khanjira Bendup Khanjira Benddown Dholak 1 Open Dholak 1 Mute Dholak 1 Slap Dhol 2 Open Dhol 2 Slap Dhol 2 Rim Mridangam na Mridangam din Mridangam ki Mridangam ta Mridangam Chapu Mridangam Lo Closed Mridangam Lo Open Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Dholki Hi Open Dholki Hi Mute Dholki Lo Open Dholki Hi Slap Dholki Lo Slide Khol Open Khol Slide Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Close Bhangra Scat 1 Bhangra Scat 2 Bhangra Scat 3 Bhangra Scat 4 Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mltatk Thavil Open Thavil Slap Thavil Mute Khartaal Dholak 2 Open Dholak 2 Slide Dholak 2 Rim 1 Dholak 2 Rim 2 Dholak 2 Ring Dholak 2 Slap Dholak 2 Body — 126/000/117 Alternate Group Tabla Kit — 126/000/040 Indian Kit Alternate Group 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 Baya ke / ge (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 12 13 14 Baya ka / ghe (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) Tabla ne / na (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 Tabla ne / tin (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) 18 18 Tabla ne / di (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) Hateli Long Hateli Short Baya ge Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ka Tabla na Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Tabla tun Tablabaya dhin Tabla di Tablabaya dhe Tabla ti Tabla ne Tabla taran Tabla tak Chipri Kanjira Open Kanjira Slap Kanjira Mute Kanjira Bend up Kanjira Bend down Dholak Open Dholak Mute Dholak Slap Dhol Open Dhol Mute Dhol Slap Dhol Slide Mridangam Normal Mridangam Open Mridangam Mute Mridangam Slap Mridangam Rim Chimta Open Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Dholki Open Dholki Mute Dholki Slap Dholki Slide Dholki Rim Khol Open Khol Slide Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Close Mridang Open Mridang Mute Mridang Rim Mridang Slide Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mltatk Madal-A2 Madal-A#2 Madal-B2 Madal-C3 Madal-C#3 Madal-D3 Madal-D#3 Madal-E3 Madal-F3 Madal-F#3 Madal-G3 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 13 13 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 113 Style List Style No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 114 Style Name 8BEAT 8BeatModern Cool8Beat 60’sGuitarPop 8BeatAdria 60’s8Beat BubblegumPop BritPopSwing 8Beat OffBeat 60’sRock HardRock RockShuffle 8BeatRock 16BEAT 16Beat PopShuffle1 PopShuffle2 GuitarPop 16BeatUptempo KoolShuffle JazzRock HipHopLight BALLAD PianoBallad LoveSong 6/8ModernEP 6/8SlowRock 6/8OrchBallad OrganBallad PopBallad 16BeatBallad1 16BeatBallad2 DANCE EuroTrance Ibiza DreamDance NewHipHop PopR&B TrancePop ChartPop HouseMusik SwingHouse TechnoPolis Clubdance ClubLatin Garage1 Garage2 TechnoParty UKPop HipHopGroove HipShuffle HipHopPop DISCO 70’sDisco1 70’sDisco2 LatinDisco DiscoPhilly SaturdayNight DiscoChocolate DiscoHands PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Style No. 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 Style Name SWING&JAZZ BigBandFast BigBandMedium BigBandBallad BigBandShuffle JazzClub Swing1 Swing2 OrchestraSwing Five/Four JazzBallad Dixieland Ragtime AfroCuban Charleston R&B Soul DetroitPop1 60’sRock&Roll 6/8Soul ModernR&B CrocoTwist Rock&Roll DetroitPop2 BoogieWoogie ComboBoogie 6/8Blues COUNTRY Country8Beat CountryPop CountrySwing CountryBallad Country2/4 CowboyBoogie CountryShuffle Bluegrass INDIAN Bolly Mix 1 Bolly Mix 2 Indian Pop Bhangra Boliyan Goan Pop Garba Rajstahan Qawwali Bhajan Tamil Kerala LATIN BrazilianSamba BossaNova PopBossa Tijuana DiscoLatin Mambo Salsa Beguine GuitarRumba RumbaFlamenco RumbaIsland Reggae Style No. 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 Style Name BALLROOM VienneseWaltz EnglishWaltz Slowfox Foxtrot Quickstep Tango Pasodoble Samba ChaChaCha Rumba Jive TRAD/WORLD USMarch 6/8March GermanMarch PolkaPop OberPolka Tarantella Showtune ChristmasSwing ChristmasWaltz ScottishReel Hawaiian WALTZ ItalianWaltz MariachiWaltz GuitarSerenade SwingWaltz JazzWaltz1 JazzWaltz2 CountryWaltz OberWaltzer Musette CHILDREN Learning2/4 Learning4/4 Learning6/8 Fun 3/4 Fun 4/4 PIANIST Stride PianoBlues1 PianoBlues2 PianoRag PianoRock&Roll PianoBoogie PianoJazzWaltz PianoJazzBld Arpeggio Musical SlowRock 8BtPianoBallad PianoSwing Arpeggio List Arpeggio No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 Arpeggio Name UpOct1 DownOct1 UpDnOct2 SynArp1 SynArp2 SyncEcho PulsLine Random Down&Up SuperArp AcidLine TekEcho VelGruv Trance1 Trance2 SynChord PfArp PfBallad PfChd8th PfShfl PfRock Clavi ChordUp ChdDance Salsa1 Salsa2 Reggae Strum GuitChd1 GuitChd2 GuitChd3 GuitArp FngrPck1 FngrPck2 Samba SlapBs AcidBs TranceBs LatinBs FunkyBs PercArp Perc1 Perc2 African Tamb R&B Funk HipHop Latin Arabic TeenTalC TeenTalD TeenTalE TeenTalF TeenTalG TeenTalA Dadra C Dadra D Dadra E Dadra F Dadra G Dadra A PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 115 Music Database List MDB No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 116 Song Name POP AlvFever BoySumer CoinLane Croco Rk DayPdise DwnTown EasySday GoMyWay HighTide HoldDown HowDeep! HurryLuv I breath I’m Torn Imagine Infatuat ISurvive JustCall JustWay LeadPack LoveFeel LoveMeT LveMeDo Mi Shell My Baby NikitTrp NoMatter ProudGtr RainOnMe SailngSx SeeAgain Sept.Pop SultanSw Sure SweetLrd ThnkMsic TitanicH UNeedLv UptnGirl WantToBe WatchGrl WhatALoo WhitePle WhleAgn Woman YelowSub YesterPf ROCK DavAgain JumpRock OyComCha PickUpPc RdRiverR SatsfyGt Sheriff SmokeWtr TwistAgn VenusPop DANCE 2 of Us B Leave Back St Crockett DialEmma DsrtRose PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual MDB No. 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 Song Name FunkyTwn Kids KillSoft Nine PM SingBack StrandD BALLAD AdelineB ArgenCry BeautBdy Bl Bayou CatMemry CavaSolo E Weiss ElizSere ElvGhett Feeling Fly Away Fnl Date GreenSlv GtCncert HrdToSay IBThere LonlyPan MBoxDnce Mn Rivr My Song NorwWood OnMyMnd OverRbow Red Lady ReleseMe SavingLv Shore Cl SierraMd SilverMn SmokyEye SndOfSil SumerPlc TblWater WhereLov WhisprSx WomanLov R&B AmazingG BoogiePf Clock Rk CU later GreenDor HappyDay JohnnyB MercySax OldHouse RisingSn S Preems ShookUp SuperStv TeddyBer Yeh Orgn SWING & JAZZ Alex Rag Blue Set ChooChoo DayOfW&R HighMoon InMood MDB No. 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 Song Name MistySax MoonLit New York PanthrSw PetiteCl RedRoses SaintMch SatinDll SF Heart ShearJz SplnkyBr SunnySde TstHoney Tunisia TwoFoot5 USPatrol WhatsNew Wild Cat WondrLnd EASY LISTENING Arriva BlackFst ByeBlues CaliBlue CiaoCpri Close2U DAmorStr DolanesM ElCondor Entrtain Frippers LoveLove LuckySax LuvStory MyPrince OSoleMio PupetStr Raindrop RedMouln R’ticGtr Schiwago ShadowGt SingRain SmallWld SpkSoft SpnishEy StrangeN TieRibbn TimeGoes WhteXmas WishStar WondrWld LATIN BambaLa BeHappy! CopaLola DayNight Ipanema JamboMbo MarinaAc MuchoTrp SmoothLt SunOfLif Sunshine Tico Org TrbWave Music Database List MDB No. 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 Song Name COUNTRY ABitMore BlownWnd Bonanza BoxerFlt CntryRds GreenGrs Jambala LondonSt LooseEL TopWorld YlwRose DISCO & PARTY AlhHwaii Babylon Barbados DnceBird FestaMex HandsPty LuvTheme ModrnTlk NxtAlice PalomaFl PubPiano Tijuana Why MCA? BALLROOM BrazilBr CherryTp DanubeWv MantoStr SandmnFx SpainTwn SundyNvr TangoAc Tea4Two TulipWtz YesSirQk TRADITIONAL AlpenTri AnchorAw Balalaik BlkSheep CampRace Ceilidh Cielito CielPari Cl Polka Comrades DAmorCl FrogSong Funiculi GrndClok HappyPlk Herzlin HornPipe JacknJil JinglBel Kufstein MexiHat MickMrch RkABaby RlBarrel Showbiz SnowWtz StarMrch MDB No. 253 254 255 256 Song Name WashPost WdCuttrs XmasWalz YankDood PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 117 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM File Name 001Nutcr.mid 002Orphe.mid 003Slavo.mid 004Prima.mid 005Medit.mid 006Guill.mid 007Fruhl.mid 008Ungar.mid 009Fruhl.mid 010Dolly.mid 011Cande.mid 012Arabe.mid 013Pasto.mid 014Petit.mid 015Innoc.mid 016Progr.mid 017Taren.mid 018Cheva.mid 019Etude.mid 020Marci.mid 021Turki.mid 022Valse.mid 023Menue.mid 024Momen.mid 025Enter.mid 026Prelu.mid 027Violl.mid 028Angel.mid 029Saraf.mid 030Ameri.mid 031Brown.mid 032Lomon.mid 033Bonni.mid 034Londo.mid 035Banjo.mid 036Vogle.mid 037Lorel.mid 038Funic.mid 039Turke.mid 040Campt.mid 041Jingl.mid 042Muss.mid 043Liebe.mid 044Jesu.mid 045Joy.mid 046Pearl.mid 047Gavot.mid 048Seren.mid 049Menue.mid 050Canon.mid 051Vogel.mid 052Piano.mid 053Surpr.mid 054WildR.mid 055Chans.mid 056Babbi.mid 057RowRo.mid 058Smoky.mid 059WeWis.mid 060ImMai.mid 061Chris.mid 062MaryH.mid 063TenLi.mid 064PopGo.mid 065Twink.mid 066Close.mid 067Cucko.mid 068Augus.mid 069Londo.mid 070Three.mid Song Name Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture Slavonic Dances op.72-2 La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) Méditation (Thaïs) Guillaume Tell Frühlingslied Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 Fruhlingsstimmen Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening La Candeur Arabesque Pastorale Petite Réunion Innocence Progrès Tarentelle La Chevaleresque Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” Marcia alla Turca Turkish March Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” Menuett Moments Musicaux op.94-3 The Entertainer Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) La Viollette Angels Serenade Krasnyj Sarafan America the Beautiful Little Brown Jug Loch Lomond My Bonnie Londonderry Air Ring de Banjo Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Die Lorelei Funiculi Funicula Turkey in the Straw Camptown Races Jingle Bells Muss i denn Liebesträume Nr.3 Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring Ode to Joy Pearl Fisher Gavotte Serenade/Haydn Menuett BWV. Anh.114 Canon in D Der Vogelfanger Bin Ich Ja “Die Xauberflote” Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 To a Wild Rose Chanson du Toreador O Mio Babbino Caro Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Im Mai (DUET) O Christmas Tree (DUET) Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Ten Little Indians (DUET) Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) The Cuckoo (DUET) O du lieber Augustin (DUET) London Bridge (DUET) Three Blind Mice (DUET) The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data. 118 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Composer P.I. Tchaikovsky J. Offenbach ˇ A. Dvorák A. Vivaldi J. Massenet G. Rossini F. Mendelssohn J. Brahms J. Strauss II T.Oesten J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller F.Chopin L.v. Beethoven W.A. Mozart F.Chopin L. Boccherini F. Schubert S. Joplin J.S. Bach L.Streabbog Traditional Traditional S.A. Ward Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S.C. Foster Traditional F. Silcher L. Denza Traditional S.C. Foster J.S. Pierpont F. Silcher F. Liszt J.S. Bach L.v. Beethoven G. Bizet F.J. Gossec F.J. Haydn J.S. Bach J. Pachelbel W.A Mozart L.v. Beethoven F.J. Haydn E.A. MacDowell G. Bizet G. Puccini Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Septimus Winner Traditional Traditional J.J. Rousseau Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Effect Type List ● Harmony Types No. Harmony Type 01 Duet 02 Trio 03 Block 04 Country 05 Octave 06 Trill 1/4 note 07 Trill 1/6 note 08 Trill 1/8 note 09 Trill 1/12 note 10 Trill 1/16 note 11 Trill 1/24 note 12 Trill 1/32 note 13 Tremolo 1/4 note 14 Tremolo 1/6 note 15 Tremolo 1/8 note 16 Tremolo 1/12 note 17 Tremolo 1/16 note 18 Tremolo 1/24 note 19 Tremolo 1/32 note 20 Echo 1/4 note 21 Echo 1/6 note 22 Echo 1/8 note 23 Echo 1/12 note 24 Echo 1/16 note 25 Echo 1/24 note 26 Echo 1/32 note Description Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing songs that contain chord data. 3 3 Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 27). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets. • The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held. • The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four). • The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ● Reverb Types No. Reverb Type Description 01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb. 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. 10 ● Chorus Types No. Chorus Type Description 01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. 03–04 Flanger 1–2 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound. Off No effect. 05 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 119 120 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Change Control 0,32 1,11,84 6,38 7,10 64 71-74 91,93 96-97 100-101 Key's Ch's After Touch Pitch Bend Note ON Note OFF Velocity o x o o o o o x o o 0-24 semi x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 9nH,v=0 *1 *1 0 - 127 : True voice ************** 3 x ************** Default Messages Altered Mode Note Number 1 - 16 x Default Changed Basic Channel o o o o o o o o o o 0-24 semi x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 0 - 127 0 - 127 3 x x 1 - 16 x Recognized MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted [ PortaTone ] Model PSR-I425 Function... YAMAHA Sustain Sound Controller Effect Depth RPN Inc,Dec RPN LSB,MSB Data Entry Bank Select Remarks Date:18-MAY-2007 Version : 1.0 MIDI Implementation Chart : True # x x x x o x Aux o(120,126,127) o(121) o(122) o(123-125) o x o o x x x o o 0 - 127 *1 Refer to #2 on page 122. Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO :All Sound OFF :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF Mes- :Active Sense sages:Reset o o x x x o o 0 - 127 ************** System : Clock Real Time: Commands Common : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune System Exclusive Prog Change o : Yes x : No MIDI Implementation Chart PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 121 MIDI Data Format NOTE: 1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs. • MIDI Master Tuning • System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type and Chorus Type. 2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the Harmony effect. 3 Exclusive <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive). • The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values for “ll” are ignored.) <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H • This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels. • The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning. • The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc”. <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 122) for details. <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 122) for details. 4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are recognized. 5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 Value for “n” is ignored. ■ Effect map * When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest to the specified value) is automatically set. * The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display. ● REVERB TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 00 01 02 08 16 17 000 No Effect 001 (01)Hall1 002 Room 003 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2 004 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2 005...127 (02)Hall2 18 19 20 (03)Hall3 (04)Room1 (05)Room2 No Effect ● CHORUS TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 000...063 00 Thru 065 Chorus 066 Celeste 067 Flanger 122 02 08 16 17 No Effect 064 068...127 01 No Effect PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual (02)Chorus2 (01)Chorus1 (03)Flanger1 (04)Flanger2 18 19 20 Specifications Keyboards Effects • 61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response. Display • LCD display (backlit) Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX Panel Controls • SONG, VOICE, STYLE, EASY SONG ARRANGER, PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF, ARPEGGIO ON/ OFF, LESSON L/R, LESSON START, METRONOME ON/ OFF, PORTABLE GRAND, DEMO, FUNCTION, MUSIC DATABASE, TOUCH ON/OFF, HARMONY ON/OFF, DUAL ON/OFF, SPLIT ON/OFF, TEMPO/TAP, [0]–[9], [+], [-], CATEGORY, Dial, ASSIGN, (ACMP ON/OFF), A-B REPEAT (SYNC STOP), PAUSE (SYNC START), START/ STOP, REW (INTRO/ENDING/rit.), FF (MAIN/AUTO FILL), REGIST MEMORY ([●] (MEMORY/BANK), [1], [2]), SONG MEMORY (REC, [1]–[5], [A]) Realtime Control • Pitch Bend Wheel • Nobs A, B A: Cutoff, Reverb, Attack, Style Cutoff, Style Tempo B: Resonance, Chorus, Release, Style Resonance Voice • 514 Voices (116 Panel Voices + 10 Indian Voices + 361 XGlite Voices + 12 Drum/SFX Kits +15 Arpeggio Voices) • Polyphony: 32 • DUAL • SPLIT Style • 162 Preset Styles + 1 User Style File • Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering: Multi Finger • Style Volume • 256 Education Feature • Dictionary • Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn Registration Memory • 8 banks x 2 types Function • VOLUME: • OVERALL: • • • • • • • • Style Volume, Song Volume Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Pitch Bend Range MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance DUAL VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance SPLIT VOICE: Voice, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, Filter Resonance EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume ARPEGGIO: SFF Load: PC: MIDI: Reverb: Chorus: Harmony: Arpeggio: 9 types 4 types 26 types 62 types Song • 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM Songs (70) • Song Clear, Track Clear • Song Volume • Song Control: , A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF, START/STOP Performance assistant technology Recording • Song User Song: 5 Songs Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE MIDI • Local On/Off • Keyboard Out • Initial Send • Style Out • External Clock • Song Out Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB, SUSTAIN Amplifier • 2.5W + 2.5W Speakers • 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2 Power Consumption • 10W Power Supply • Adaptor: Yamaha PA-3C, or an equivalent • Batteries: Six “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries Dimensions (W x D x H) • 952 x 388 x 146 mm (37-1/2" x 15-1/4" x 5-3/4") Weight • 7.0kg (15 lbs. 7 oz.) (not including batteries) Included Accessories Music Database • • • • • • Music Rest • Accessory CD-ROM • Owner’s Manual Optional Accessories • • • • AC Power Adaptor: Footswitch: Keyboard Stand: Headphones: Yamaha PA-3C, or an equivalent FC4/FC5 L-2C/L-2L HPE-150 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Arpeggio Type, Arpeggio Velocity Style File Load PC Mode Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send, Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out • METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature Denominator, Metronome Volume • LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L) • UTILITY: Grade, Demo Cancel PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 123 Index Panel controls and terminals r f +, - .................................................. 12, 58 ........................................................ 57 0–9 .................................................. 12, 58 A-B REPEAT ................................. 13, 78 ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 12, 34 ARPEGGIO ON/OFF .................... 12, 14 ASSIGN ......................................... 12, 18 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] .......... 12, 58 DC IN 12V ..................................... 10, 13 DEMO ............................................ 12, 40 Dial ................................................. 12, 58 DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 12, 29 EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 12, 50 FF ................................................... 13, 40 FUNCTION .................................... 12, 82 HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 12, 60 INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 13, 71 KNOB A, B .................................... 12, 18 LESSON L/R ................................. 12, 44 LESSON START ........................... 12, 44 MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 13, 71 MASTER VOLUME ..................... 12, 24 MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 13, 80 METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 12, 63 MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 12, 49 PAUSE ........................................... 13, 40 PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT ON/OFF ...................................... 12, 23 PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 11, 13 PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 13, 66 PORTABLE GRAND .................... 12, 31 REC, 1–5, A ................................... 13, 52 REGIST MEMORY ....................... 13, 80 ................................................. 12, 48 REW ............................................... 13, 40 SONG ............................................. 12, 39 SONG MEMORY .......................... 13, 52 SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 12, 30 STANDBY/ON ...............................11-12 START/STOP ................................ 13, 58 STYLE ........................................... 12, 33 SUSTAIN ....................................... 11, 13 SYNC START ............................... 13, 70 SYNC STOP .................................. 13, 71 TEMPO/TAP .................................. 13, 27 TOUCH ON/OFF ........................... 12, 65 USB ................................................ 13, 86 VOICE ............................................ 12, 28 Alphabetical order A F A-B Repeat ...........................................78 Accessories .............................................7 ACMP ...................................................34 Arpeggio ...............................................14 Arpeggio List ......................................115 Arpeggio Type ......................................15 Arpeggio Velocity ................................67 Attack ....................................................20 Auto Accompaniment Range ................34 Auto-Accompaniment ..........................34 AWM ......................................................6 Filter ..................................................... 19 Filter (Style) ......................................... 20 Flash Memory ...................................... 42 Foot Switch .......................................... 11 Function .......................................... 82-83 G Grade .................................................... 45 H B Backup ..................................................56 Harmony ............................................... 60 Harmony Type ..................................... 60 Harmony Volume ................................. 69 Headphones .......................................... 11 C CD-ROM ..............................................92 Channel Message ..................................86 Chord .................................. 36, 38, 75-76 Chord Dictionary ..................................77 CHORD ROOT ....................................77 CHORD TYPE .....................................77 Chorus .............................................19, 62 Chorus Type .................................62, 119 Computer ..............................................86 Cutoff ....................................................19 D Default Setting ......................................82 Delete (Song Track) ..............................55 Delete (User Song) ...............................55 Demo ....................................................40 Demo Cancel ........................................84 Display ..................................................59 Drum Kit ...............................................32 Drum Kit List ......................................111 Dual Voice ............................................29 Dual Voice Chorus Level .....................83 Dual Voice Octave ................................83 Dual Voice Pan .....................................83 Dual Voice Reverb Level .....................83 Dual Voice Volume ..............................83 E Easy Chords ..........................................38 Easy Song Arranger ..............................50 Effect Map ..........................................122 Effect Type List ..................................119 Evaluation .............................................45 External Song .......................................42 I Initial Send ..................................... 84, 89 Initialization ......................................... 56 K Keyboard Out ....................................... 87 L Lesson .................................................. 43 Load SFF .............................................. 74 Local ..................................................... 87 L-Part ................................................... 91 M Main Voice ........................................... 28 Main Voice Chorus Level .................... 83 Main Voice Octave .............................. 83 Main Voice Pan .................................... 83 Main Voice Reverb Level .................... 83 Main Voice Volume ............................. 83 Master EQ Type ................................... 69 Measure ................................................ 59 Melody Voice ................................. 51, 79 Metronome ........................................... 63 MIDI ..................................................... 85 MIDI Data Format ............................. 122 MIDI Implementation Chart .............. 120 Music Database .................................... 49 Music Database List ........................... 116 Music Rest .............................................. 7 Mute ..................................................... 79 N Notation ................................................ 59 124 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual Index O T One Touch Setting ................................ 68 Tempo ...................................................27 Time Denominator ................................64 Time Numerator ...................................64 Time Signature .....................................63 Touch Response ....................................65 Touch Sensitivity ..................................65 Track ............................................... 52-55 Track Clear ...........................................55 Transfer ........................................... 89-91 Transpose ..............................................66 Troubleshooting (Installation) ..............97 Troubleshooting (Instrument) ...............99 Tuning ...................................................66 P PC Mode ............................................... 88 Performance assistant technology ........ 23 Pitch Bend Range ................................. 83 Power Adaptor ..................................... 10 Preset Song ................................39, 41-42 R Recording ............................................. 52 Registration Memory ........................... 80 Release ................................................. 20 Remote control ..................................... 88 Repeat ................................................... 48 Resonance ............................................ 19 Reverb ............................................ 19, 61 Reverb Type ....................................... 119 R-Part ................................................... 91 U USB ......................................................86 USB MIDI Driver ........................... 95-96 User file ................................................91 User Song .............................................52 V S Save (Panel Setting) ............................. 80 Save (User File) .................................... 91 Score ............................................100-105 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 89 Software Licensing Agreement ............ 98 Song ...................................................... 39 Song Clear ............................................ 55 Song List ...................................... 41, 118 Song Memory ....................................... 52 Song Out ............................................... 87 Song Volume ........................................ 78 Specifications ..................................... 123 Split Point ....................................... 30, 72 Split Voice ............................................ 30 Split Voice Chorus Level ..................... 83 Split Voice Octave ............................... 83 Split Voice Pan ..................................... 83 Split Voice Reverb Level ..................... 83 Split Voice Volume .............................. 83 Standard Chords ................................... 38 Style ...........................................33-37, 70 Style File .............................................. 74 Style List ............................................ 114 Style Out ............................................... 87 Style Tempo ......................................... 20 Style Volume ........................................ 72 Sustain (Footswitch) ............................. 11 Synchro Start ............................ 34, 36, 70 Synchro Stop ........................................ 71 System Message ................................... 86 Voice .....................................................28 Voice List ...........................................107 X XGlite .....................................................6 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual 125 126 PSR-I425 Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria, CEE Department Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 ASIA INDIA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA SWEDEN Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 MALAYSIA DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 SINGAPORE NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 THAILAND OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 [PK] 40 Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page (English Only) http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2007 Yamaha Corporation WK62010 XXXPOXXX.X-01A0 Printed in China
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107
  • Page 108 108
  • Page 109 109
  • Page 110 110
  • Page 111 111
  • Page 112 112
  • Page 113 113
  • Page 114 114
  • Page 115 115
  • Page 116 116
  • Page 117 117
  • Page 118 118
  • Page 119 119
  • Page 120 120
  • Page 121 121
  • Page 122 122
  • Page 123 123
  • Page 124 124
  • Page 125 125
  • Page 126 126
  • Page 127 127
  • Page 128 128

Yamaha PortaTone PSR-I425 Handleiding

Categorie
Digitale piano's
Type
Handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor